JP2022162067A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing game amusement.

SOLUTION: After performing a betting operation, a slot machine 10 starts the rotation of each of reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on operation of a start lever 41. Then, the corresponding reels are stopped by operating stop switches 42 to 44, a stop combination according to a lottery result is stopped, and tokens can be put out. In addition, a push order bell is provided in which a combination to be won differs depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an advantageous section in which a push order notification is performed when a push order bell is won and a normal section in which the push order notification is not performed are set. When shifting to the advantageous section, a shift lottery to an AT mode in which the push order notification easily occurs is executed, using the value of a BB putout counter for grasping the number of tokens that are put out in a first BB state and a second BB state.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that enables a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and a second result in which the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. a second result that allows winning when operated in the operation mode of 2,
A mode notification means capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode and the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
A specific state is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed,
means capable of transitioning to the specific state based on predetermined transition conditions;
means capable of terminating the specific state based on a predetermined termination condition;
means capable of executing a transition determination that enables the transition condition to be established based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
means capable of executing a predetermined process related to the mode notification in the game subsequent to the game in which the transition condition is satisfied;
with
The transition determination is set so that the number of cases in which it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied is greater than the number of cases in which it is determined that the transition condition is not satisfied,
means capable of executing the first notification in a game in which the transition condition is satisfied;
means capable of executing a second notification in a game in which the predetermined process is executed;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for carryover states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. It is a diagram for explaining the difference in the degree of advantage of each game state. It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of an advantageous area transition lottery table and an AT mode transition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. 4 is a flowchart showing AT type determination processing; It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows an example of a ceiling game number table. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a display control device as a sub-side control device; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing BB effect setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display effect by the auxiliary display unit and the number of ceiling games; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display effect by the auxiliary display unit and the game result; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between advantageous sections and BBs; In Modified Example 1, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the award given, (b) is a diagram showing a part of the BB state lottery table, and (c) is at the time of transition. It is a figure which shows an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section. 10 is a flowchart showing a first section display process in Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table upon transition; 14 is a flowchart showing a first section display process in Modification 3. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing processing when transitioning to an advantageous section in modification 4; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table for transition, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an AT type table. 19 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing in Modified Example 5. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the information lottery table. 29 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing in Modification 6. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining number management processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the information lottery table. 19 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in Modification 7. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a part of a lottery table for normal game state, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for shifting to AT mode, and (c) is a relationship between AT mode and BB state. It is a figure for explaining. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing second section display processing in Modification 8. FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an advantageous section transition lottery table in modification 9; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table upon transition; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing second section display processing in the second embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a part of production|presentation setting processing at the time of all stop. (a) is a flowchart showing a BB effect setting process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between advantageous sections and BBs; 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in modification 2. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 12(a) is a view showing part of a lottery table for normal gaming state, and FIG. 11(b) is a flow chart showing second section display processing in Modified Example 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a part of production|presentation setting processing at the time of all stop. 10 is a flowchart showing BB effect setting processing; 14 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in Modification 4. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table upon transition; (a) is a flowchart showing a BB effect setting process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit. (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the effect setting process at the time of all stop, (b), (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display effect by the auxiliary display unit. 14 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in Modification 5. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table upon transition; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing when transitioning to an advantageous section in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a ceiling game number table. It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the information lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing processing when transitioning to an advantageous section in Modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a specific flag set lottery table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a notification lottery table in modification 2; 14 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in Modification 3. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the frequency with which the advantageous section transition processing is performed according to the type of BB state;

<First embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Ark shell" symbol (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), "White shell" symbol (eg, left reel 32L) 19th reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting medals and a line that is not activated are set. As winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is awarded, or a privilege of shifting the game state is awarded. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, three medals are betted and the game is started. In this case, only the bend line L6 is set as the valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as the valid lines. . In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following description, a 3-bet game is a game that starts with 3 medals bet, a 2-bet game is a game that starts with 2 medals bet, and a 2-bet game starts with 1 medal. The game is also called a one-bet game. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, a 1-bet game and a 2-bet game are not set. That is, in this embodiment, only 3-bet games are set.

FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 are diagrams showing the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 27th small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML, the first minor winning combination is won. When the first minor winning combination is established, seven medals are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop together on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Ark shell" symbol or "Seinen" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "White 7" symbol and "White shellfish" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the active line ML, the second minor winning combination is won. When the second minor win is established, seven medals are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML, the third minor win is won. When the third minor winning combination is established, seven medals are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop together on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

The 4th to 27th minor wins are so-called "lost wins" in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st minor win is missed. When the 4th to 27th minor wins are won, one medal is paid out. The 4th to 27th small wins are the left reel 32L "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol or "bell". Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 8, the combinations of symbols corresponding to the 4th to 27th minor winning prizes are arranged so that the "bell" symbols do not stop together on a straight line (L1 to L5). , and is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the winning of the 1st to 27th minor wins, the paid out medals are a kind of privilege given according to the game results. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying the next game can be played without inserting medals are given to the first replaying winning to the eleventh replaying winning. As shown in FIG. 9, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to eleventh replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 10(d), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win stop on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. Winning will be established. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the "BAR" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 12(b). As shown, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop in order from the left on the upward right line L5. When the second replay win is established, the game state does not shift, but the shift to the information mode advantageous for the player occurs, and the AT mode in which medal acquisition can be expected is started. Note that the AT mode will be described later in detail.

The third and fourth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

In the fifth replay, the left reel 32L has a "bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "watermelon" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "cherry" symbol. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML. As shown in FIG. 10(e), when the symbol corresponding to the fifth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the fifth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The sixth replay includes the “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 10(f), when the symbols corresponding to the sixth replay win stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), so that the so-called "watermelon tenpai" is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The seventh replay consists of a “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “white 7” symbol, a “cherry” symbol, a “red clam” symbol or a “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay win stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the medium line L2.

In the eighth replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that the so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The ninth replay consists of the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``White 7'' symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, the ``Cherry'' symbol, the ``red clam'' symbol or the ``Seinen'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stops on the active line ML, winning is established. Also, in the eleventh replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 11(c) and 11(d), when the symbol corresponding to the ninth re-game winning or the 11th re-game winning is stopped on the activated line ML, a "cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the ninth replay or the eleventh replay is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the ninth regame. However, in the case of the 11th re-game winning, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 9th re-game winning and the 11th re-game winning. In the tenth re-game, winning is established when the ninth re-game and the eleventh re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

More specifically, the 10th re-game win is established when the 9th re-game is won and the 9th re-game win cannot be established, and the 11th re-game is won. It is established when the 11th regame winning prize cannot be established. That is, when the 10th re-game win is established, it is difficult to distinguish whether the 9th re-game is won or the 11th re-game is won. In other words, in order to determine whether the ninth regame or the eleventh regame has been won, it is necessary to operate the left reel 32L aiming at "Cherry".

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB win is won. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB win are stopped on the activated line ML, the white 7 symbols are stopped on the middle line L2.

When the ``white 7'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white shell'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the ``BAR'' symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB win is won. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning is stopped on the activated line ML, the "WHITE 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The "red 7" pattern stops in the middle row.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual tokens as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to three and the specific number is set to three, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when virtual medals are inserted and the prescribed number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, When three virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits, the specified number is set to three or two, and the specific number is set to two, the first When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal. The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting two virtual medals.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. A direction monitor 68 is provided which has an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is a lower display section 69 in which the model name of the game machine is written and which may constitute a predetermined display screen. is provided. The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, an operation means for effect may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be an operation means capable of being operated.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. In addition to resetting the error state, the reset switch 72 is also operated to clear various stored information in the slot machine 10 and to change the winning probability.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. , a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the set value, the set value information storage area 106c for storing the set value, and the like.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 15), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 14, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the input side of which is connected to the main control device 101, and the output side of which the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Below, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the main process will be explained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether or not the read result is normal. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to games will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16 .

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the end of the start waiting process, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "3" is set as the specified number in the gaming state other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "3", and even in a non-bonus state, the process proceeds to step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "3". affirmatively. In other words, if medals are not betted, or if the number of bets is "1" or "2" even if medals are betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211, and the medal payout process of step S212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is obtained. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, a lottery table corresponding to the game state is selected. For example, when the current game state is the normal game state, the lottery table for normal game state is selected. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the set value is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the set value is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing of the RAM 106 . In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored in the setting value information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

In step S302, if the current game has not won the first BB or second BB bonus and is in the normal game state, then in step S302 a lottery table for normal game state is acquired. FIG. 18 is a normal game state lottery table obtained in the normal game state. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After acquiring the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the following step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the second minor winning flag and the third minor winning flag are set in step S306. Further, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=24, the first BB winning flag and the first replay winning flag are set in step S306, and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25. If so, the second BB winning flag and the first replay winning flag are set in step S306.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In the state that the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing of the game is performed with reference to the lottery table for the carryover state. In the carryover state lottery table (FIG. 19), each index value IV and point value PV are set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

Instead of preparing a separate lottery table for the carryover state, in step S306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, the winning combination corresponding to the 1BB and 2BB If a winning combination other than the overlapping 2nd BB) is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if the winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set. .

That is, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=24 while the first BB winning flag is carried over, the first BB winning flag and the first replay winning flag are not set. , in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11, the 1st minor winning winning flag, the 4th minor winning winning flag, the 5th minor winning winning flag A winning flag and an eighth minor combination winning flag may be set.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when judging whether a role is right or wrong using the lottery table shown in FIG. probability) is about 1 in 27.3. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are about 1/26.2 is. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164, and the probability of winning the chance B (probability of winning when IV=5). is about 1/262, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 1/16400, and the chance B is higher than the chance C. is easier to win, and chance A is easier to win than chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV=9) is It is about 1/13100, and is set so that cherry B is easier to win than cherry C, and cherry A is easier to win than cherry B. The probability of winning the common bell (the probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/6550. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as the pushing order bell) (the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is about It is 1/18.2. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/219. The probability of winning the duplicated 1st BB (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/20.1. The probability of winning the duplicated 2nd BB (probability of winning when IV=25) is about 1/6.7. The probability of winning either the 1st BB or the 2nd BB of these duplicated repetitions (probability of winning when IV = 24, 25) is about 1/5 in total, and the other roles (repeated) The odds of winning are set higher than those of games, minor wins, and IV (IV=1-23).

In the carryover state lottery table (Fig. 19) obtained in the situation where the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the winning probability of the lip overlap 1 BB and the lip overlap 2 BB corresponding to the 1 BB or 2 BB is normal game Unlike the state lottery table, other lottery probabilities are the same for the normal game state and carryover state. That is, in the lottery table for the carryover state, the probability of winning the duplicated 1st BB and the duplicated 2nd BB (probability of winning when IV=24, 25) is zero. And in the lottery table for the carryover state, the probability of not winning any role (probability of losing result) is about 1/5.02 because you do not win the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. be. Incidentally, the lottery table for the normal game state and the lottery table for the carryover state are acquired according to the state in the process of step S302.

By the way, in the normal game state, excluding the increase and decrease in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, you can expect a decrease of about 0.91 medals per game (net increase minus about 0.91 medals), and in the carryover state , excluding the increase/decrease in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, a reduction of about 1.51 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 1.51 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the win flag set in step S306. For example, the bell 1 in the pressing order is won (winning when IV=11), and the 1st minor win flag, 4th minor win win flag, 5th minor win win flag and 8th minor win win flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the first, fourth, fifth and eighth minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, when the watermelon is won (winning when IV=23) and the 2nd minor winning combination winning flag and the 3rd minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 2nd minor winning combination and the 3rd minor winning winning combination are displayed. Stop symbol information is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped.

In subsequent step S313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. In the priority setting process, the following priority is set when a plurality of roles are won out of each role of small win, replay, and bonus. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in a situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set, and the game in which the 1BB was won or the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, and the 1BB is won. , When the setting of the stop symbol information corresponding to the second minor winning combination and the third minor winning combination is performed, the second minor winning combination and the third minor winning combination are established with priority over the first BB winning. Set priorities. In addition, in the situation where the 2BB is won (the 2BB winning flag is set, and the game where the 2BB is won or the 2BB winning is carried over), the normal reply is won, and the 2BB is won. When the stop pattern information corresponding to the winning and the first replay and the second replay winning are set, the order of priority is set so that each replay winning takes precedence over the second BB winning. do.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established. And in this embodiment, it is configured to win the 1st BB or the 2nd BB by winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. And not only the second BB but also the first replay is won. Therefore, in a game in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the 1st replay win is established instead of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB.

After executing the process of step S313, after executing the section display first process in step S314, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won at the push order bell (see FIGS. 18 and 19), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 12th minor winning prize, the 13th minor winning prize or the 16th minor winning prize is established when the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In such a case, the stop information is set so that the 12th minor winning combination, the 13th minor winning combination, and the 16th minor winning combination, as well as the 1st minor winning combination, can be realized. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the 12th minor winning combination, the 13th minor winning combination or the 16th minor winning combination as described above.

The twelfth minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. Further, the 13th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 16th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. These 12th, 13th and 16th minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 12th, 13th and 16th minor combination symbols will appear on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 16th small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 13th minor winning combination to be established, the 12th minor winning combination and the 16th minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 13th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the second stop information setting process so that the 13th minor combination winning can be established.

The 13th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 13th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 13th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 13th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 13th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 15th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2 . That is, the 15th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 13th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 13th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 15th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 13th minor winning symbol and the 15th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 13th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the active line. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 15th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 13th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 13th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 15th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 1st minor winning combination, the 12th minor winning combination, the 13th minor winning combination or the 16th minor winning combination.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the priority setting process (step S313) of the lottery process (FIG. 17), as the priority when the winning flags for a plurality of small wins are set, the symbol number priority control and the number priority are given. The priority is set based on either control. That is, as described above, for example, when a bonus and a minor winning combination (1st minor winning combination to 27th minor winning combination in which medals can be paid out) are won at the same time, the winning of the minor winning combination is established preferentially. When the bonus and the replay are won at the same time, the winning of the replay is preferentially established. On the other hand, if multiple small wins are won at the same time, the small wins with the same number of medals paid out as a benefit at the time of winning are grouped, and the winning symbols of each group are handled. Symbol number priority control that is set so that small wins for groups with a large number of attached symbols are preferentially established, and small wins for groups with a large number of medals paid out as a benefit at the time of winning are prioritized. The priority order is set by one of the sheet number priority control that is set so that .

For example, the case of the 1st minor winning combination, the 12th minor winning combination, the 13th minor winning combination, and the 16th minor winning combination, which are associated with the operation order of middle→left→right in the middle-order pushing bell 1 will be described. When the 1st minor winning combination is established, 15 medals are paid out, whereas when the 12th minor winning combination, the 13th minor winning combination or the 16th minor winning combination is established, 1 medal is paid out. In this case, as the grouping of small wins that share the same number of medals paid out as a privilege at the time of winning, the first group (first small win) pays out 15 medals and the payout of 1 medal occurs. The second group (12th small win, 13th small win and 16th small win). In the symbol number priority control, for example, the winning symbols of the first group on the middle reel 32M (the first minor combination symbols on the middle reel 32M) are "replay" symbols, and four of them are provided on the middle reel 32M. , the winning symbols of the second group on the middle reel 32M (the 12th, 13th and 16th minor winning symbols of the middle reel 32M) are the “replay” symbols and the “red clam” symbols, and In 32M, five symbols are provided, and since there are more winning symbols in the second group, it is set so that the second group wins a small win with priority. On the other hand, in the number-of-numbers priority control, it is set so that the first group with a large number of medals to be paid out wins a small winning combination preferentially. In other words, when the central forward push bell 1 is operated in the operation order of middle → left → right, when the symbol number priority control is applied, the 12th minor winning prize, the 13th minor winning prize or the 16th minor winning prize Control is performed so as to be established, whereas when the number priority control is applied, control is performed so as to establish the first minor winning combination.

In the case where the middle order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right associated with the first minor combination, when symbol number priority control is applied, The first minor symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, the twelfth minor symbol and the thirteenth minor symbol are "replay" symbols, and the sixteenth minor symbol is a "white 7" symbol. In this case, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, if it is possible to simultaneously stop the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the effective line (upper row). , "replay" symbols or "white 7" symbols are preferentially stopped on the active line. The "Replay" symbol and the "White 7" symbol are arranged so that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Either the symbol or the 16th minor combination symbol is stopped. As described above, the remaining left reel 32L and right reel 32R are controlled to be stopped so as to win as many possible small wins as possible in relation to the already stopped symbols. That is, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, if the symbol number priority control is applied, even if the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, there is no room for winning the 1st minor combination, and the 12th minor combination winning, the 12th minor combination winning, and the 12th minor combination winning, Either the 13th minor winning prize or the 16th minor winning prize will be established.

On the other hand, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right corresponding to the first minor combination, the number priority control is applied. In this case, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, it is possible to simultaneously stop the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol or "white 7" symbol on the effective line (upper row). For example, stop control is performed so that the "bell" symbol, which is the first minor combination symbol, is preferentially stopped on the activated line. Since the "bell" symbols are arranged so that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less, the first minor combination symbol stops on the activated line regardless of the operation timing. As for the first minor combination, not only the middle reel 32M but also the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are arranged so that the pattern spacing is 4 patterns or less. , it is possible to stop the first minor winning symbol. Therefore, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right, if the number priority control is applied, the first minor winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing.

Not limited to the middle order push bell 1, in each push order bell, in the operation order corresponding to the first small win, the 4th to 27th small wins in which one medal is paid out in addition to the first small win are set (FIG. 21). Then, regardless of the pressing order bell, the number of winning symbols in the group different from the first minor combination is set to be larger in the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination.

In this embodiment, in any game state, such as the normal game state, the carryover state of the 1st BB to the 2nd BB, and the 1BB state and the 2nd BB state, basically the number priority control is applied to each small winning combination. It is configured to set the priority between In other words, in any game state, even if the operation order when the bell is won in the pressing order corresponds to the 4th to 27th small wins in addition to the 1st minor win, the number priority control Winning of the 1st minor winning combination of paying out 7 medals is preferentially established instead of the 4th to 27th minor winning winning combinations of paying out 1 medal.

That is, in a game in which the pressing order of the bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order corresponding to the operation order including the first minor winning combination, the first minor winning combination is established and seven coins are awarded. Medal payout occurs. On the other hand, in the game in which the bell is won in the pressing order, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order corresponding to the operation order not including the first minor winning combination, the winning of the first minor winning combination is not established. Otherwise, the 4th to 27th small winning combinations are established and one medal is paid out, or none of the small winning combinations is established and is missed and no medals are paid out.

By the way, when the common bell is won, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag is set, and the 4th to 27th minor winning combination winning flags for which one medal is to be paid out are not set. Therefore, when the common bell is won, even if the symbol number priority control is applied, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step S414. In the bonus state processing, processing for shifting to a bonus state such as a first BB state or a second BB state is performed based on the winning result. The bonus state processing will be described later in detail. In the subsequent step S415, a winning result handling process is performed. In the winning result handling process, a process for switching the display mode or the like is performed based on the winning result. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to eleventh re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , the medal payout process is terminated. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

<Bonus status processing>
The bonus state processing of step S414 in the reel control processing will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the bonus state process is a process started between the payout determination process (step S413) and the winning result handling process (step S415) in the reel control process (FIG. 20).

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on whether there is a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, it is determined whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established, the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, the BB win flag corresponding to the BB that won this time is cleared.

After that, in step S505, the BB status flag corresponding to the BB that won this time is set in the various flag storage area 106d. That is, when the first BB prize is established, the first BB state flag is set, and when the second BB prize is established, the second BB state flag is set. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step S501.

In the subsequent step S506, after executing a process of setting a BB start command corresponding to the BB that has won this time as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this bonus state process ends. That is, when the first BB winning is established, the first BB start command is set, and when the second BB winning is established, the second BB start command is set. By receiving the first BB start command and the second BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp the type of bonus state to be shifted, and displays the BB start effect corresponding to the bonus state to be shifted on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Execute the processing for

If the determination in step S501 is affirmative and the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step S507 to execute processing for adding 1 to the BB game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The BB game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the bonus state (first BB state or second BB state). It is a kind of special information that is updated according to the progress of the game until the end.

In the following step S508, it is determined whether or not any minor combination has been won as the game result of the current game.

Here, the BB state lottery table used for the lottery of each game in the first BB state and the second BB state will be described with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, the same BB state lottery table is used for both the first BB state and the second BB state, and the content of the lottery result and winning probability of each game in the first BB state and the second BB state are common. In addition, in the BB state lottery table, point values PV of index values IV=1 to 10 and 12 to 23 are common to those in the normal game state lottery table and carryover state lottery table, and these index values IV= The probability of winning 1 to 10 and 12 to 23 is common in the normal game state, the carryover state, the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state. On the other hand, the point value PV is set so that the probability of winning at the common bell with the index value IV=11 is higher in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state than in the normal game state and the carryover state. In that respect, the first BB state and the second BB state are more advantageous for the player than the normal game state and the carryover state.

In step S508, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination with an index value IV of 11 to 23 has been established. Alternatively, even if any of the small winning combinations with index values IV=11 to 23 is won, no winning is established and the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any of the minor wins have been won, the process proceeds to step S509, and the number of medals to be paid out as a win is established in the current game is added to the BB payout counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. Execute the process. As for the number of medals to be paid out, the result of the payout determination process in step S412 immediately before can be used. The BB payout counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of medals paid out in the bonus state (first BB state or second BB state). It is a kind of special information that is updated according to the progress of the game until the state ends.

After executing the process of step S509, it is determined in step S510 whether or not the BB payout counter is equal to or greater than "71" set as the upper limit payout number for the BB state. If a negative determination is made in step S510, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and processing for ending the bonus state is executed.

That is, in step S511, a process of initializing the BB game counter is executed. Through such processing, the BB game counter as special information is set to the initial value (0). In the subsequent step S512, a process for initializing the BB payout counter is executed. Through such processing, the BB payout counter as special information is set to the initial value (0). In the subsequent step S513, a process of clearing the BB status flag corresponding to the bonus status to be terminated this time is executed. That is, when ending the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and when ending the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S514, the BB end command corresponding to the bonus state to be ended this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this bonus state processing is ended. That is, when ending the first BB state, the first BB end command is set, and when ending the second BB state, the second BB end command is set. By receiving the first BB end command and the second BB end command, the display control device 81 can grasp the type of the bonus state to be ended, and displays the BB end effect corresponding to the bonus state to be ended on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Execute the processing for

In this embodiment, as described above, in the normal game state, the carryover state, the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, except for the winning probability of the common bell (IV=11), each re-game result and winning of a small combination probabilities are common. In the BB state lottery table, the point values PV of the index values IV=24 and 25 corresponding to the first BB and the second BB are set to 0. Therefore, in the first BB state and the second BB state, IV = 24, 25 in which the point value PV is set to 0, the number of tokens that can be expected to increase or decrease per game is the same except for the common bell. The probability of winning a common bell is about 1/6550 in the carryover state, and about 1/3280 in the 1BB and 2BB states. , the difference is very small. Then, as shown in FIG. 24, assuming that the operating order corresponding to the first minor combination is matched with a probability of 1/6 when the bell is won in the pressing order, the carryover state is about 1.0 per game. A decrease of 51 medals can be expected (net increase minus about 1.51), and a decrease of about 1.51 medals per game can be expected even in the first BB state and second BB state (net increase minus about 1.51). 51 sheets).

On the other hand, if the pushing order bell is announced when the pushing order bell is won (AT mode), the winning of the 1st minor combination will be established for all the pushing order bells that will be won with a probability of about 1/1.5. In the carryover state, you can expect an increase of about 2.06 medals per game (net increase plus about 2.06 medals), and even in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, you can expect about 2.06 medals per game. An increase of medals can be expected (net increase plus about 2.06 medals). In other words, even if the pressing order notification is performed, the medal increase expected value is set so that there is almost no difference between the carryover state and the first BB state or the second BB state. However, this embodiment has a characteristic configuration in which an event that is advantageous to the player can occur by causing a transition to the first BB state or the second BB state in a situation where the pressing order notification is performed. ing. Therefore, first, the configuration for informing the pressing order will be described, and then the configuration for the first BB state and the second BB state will be described.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 25, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed. state), and the like.

First, in steps S601 to S603, the process of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. to run. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the number of bets is "3". Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the number of bets is "3". If a negative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, and there is no specific prescribed number of bets for the current game that is prescribed in association with the gaming state, the processing for the display mode after step S604 (instruction function process) is terminated without performing the lottery result correspondence process.

As already explained, in this embodiment, only the 3-bet game can be executed in any gaming state. will be judged affirmatively. In other words, the display mode processing (processing regarding the instruction function) from step S604 onward is executed in each game in any of the normal game state, carryover state, first BB state, and second BB state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, in the slot machine 10, regarding whether or not a push order notification or the like is generated, an advantageous section in which the push order notification or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section. is.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section shift lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 28, as a trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, a result that has a common winning probability in any of the normal game state, the carryover state, the first BB state, and the second BB state is set as the trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S704, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the game result ascertained in step S701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step S706, after executing the process of setting the advantageous zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the advantageous zone transfer lottery process is terminated. . The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone has been won in the current game.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag or any AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode win flag is a flag that is set when a lottery for switching to the AT mode is won. Also, when shifting to the AT mode, an AT mode flag is set according to the type of AT mode. That is, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the transition to the AT mode has already been confirmed or has been completed. If none of the flags have been set in step S606 and the transition to the AT mode has not yet been determined, an AT lottery process is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S606, AT addition processing is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing the transition to the AT mode regardless of the suitability of the AT mode transition lottery (without winning) when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches the ceiling game number. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, as described above, the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. Deducted in certain games.

After executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in step S801, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter has reached 0 in step S802. If it has not reached 0, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in steps S803 to S807.

That is, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which the AT mode transition lottery is easier to win than the normal mode are set as display modes with different winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode flag is the CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU to recognize that it is.

If the CZ mode flag is not set at step S803, then at step S804, a process of acquiring a normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set at step S803, then at step S805, a process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is executed.

As shown in FIG. 28, the normal AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ AT mode transition lottery table each have a winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery set according to the lottery result of the game. If it is an AT mode transition lottery triggered by eye A, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 1% for normal use, and if it is for CZ, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 3%. The AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. Also, the normal reply A, normal reply B and normal reply C are set so that the normal reply does not win the AT mode transition, while the CZ reply may win the AT mode transition.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is obtained in step S804 or step S805, AT mode transition lottery processing is executed in step S806 based on the obtained transition lottery table. Then, in step S807, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition win has been made.

If it is determined at step S807 that the AT mode transition is won, or if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 at step S802, the AT mode winning process of steps S808 to S810 is executed. Further, when it is determined in step S807 that the AT mode transition win has not been made, a process for AT mode non-win win is executed in steps S811 to S814.

In the AT mode winning process, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S809. The CZ mode is terminated by performing the processing of step S809. If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S808, or after the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S809, the process of setting the AT mode win flag is executed in step S810. By executing the process of step S810, affirmative determination is made in step S606 in the next lottery result handling process.

On the other hand, in the AT mode non-winning process, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in step S811, and if not set, the CZ mode shift lottery process is executed in step S812. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, a CZ mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 28 is obtained, and a lottery is performed to determine whether to transition to the CZ mode based on the lottery result of the current game and random numbers for lottery. The CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the more easily the AT mode transition lottery is won, the more easily the CZ mode transition lottery is won. Therefore, in spite of the fact that the AT mode transition lottery is likely to be won, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, it becomes easier to win the CZ mode, and the player can be saved. is planned.

After executing the CZ mode transition lottery process, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery is won in step S813. Run. If it is determined in step S811 that it is in the CZ mode, or if it is determined in step S813 that the CZ mode transition lottery is not won, the AT lottery process is terminated.

After executing the process of step S810 or step S814, the process for setting the portent mode is performed in steps S815 to S818. The portent mode is a mode for suggesting winning of the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery in the game before notification of winning the lottery for transition to the CZ mode. In step S815, a process of determining the number of games in the portent mode by lottery is performed. In the processing of step S815, the number of games in the portent mode is randomly determined, for example, from 0 to 32 games. It should be noted that it is also possible to set the number of games in the omen mode to be different depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the transition winning. It may be set so that the number of games in the omen mode may differ between when the lottery is won and when the lottery is won.

After executing the precursor game number lottery process in step S815, a process of inputting a numerical value corresponding to the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S816. The portent counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the portent mode, and is decremented by one each time one game of the portent mode is completed. After that, in step S817, a portent flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and in step S818, a portent command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Then, this AT lottery processing ends. do. The precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the precursor mode is on. Further, the portent command includes information corresponding to the number of games in the portent mode, and the display control device 81 receives the portent command to grasp the number of games in the portent mode, The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the corresponding effect (forecast effect).

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the AT add-on process is a process executed when the AT mode winning flag or any AT mode flag is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous AT mode games. be.

In the AT addition processing, first, in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S902, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the AT mode, a first AT mode and a second AT mode with different additional winning probability are set, and the second AT mode is set so that the additional winning probability is higher than that of the first AT mode. It is More specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, in the additional lottery table, the additional winning rate is set according to the lottery result of the game and the type of AT mode. is set so that in the first AT mode, the player wins the additional lottery with a probability of 5%, while in the second AT mode, the player wins the additional lottery with a probability of 10%.

In step S903, an additional lottery is executed, and in step S904, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the addition lottery is won, the number-of-addition-games lottery process is executed in step S905. In the add-on game number lottery process, the add-on game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current add-on game number is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 30, the add-on game number table is set so that the add-on game number differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the add-on. On the other hand, if Cherry A is used as a trigger, an average of 15 games will be added on average. It is set so that the number of additional games is larger in the case.

After executing the number-of-additional-games lottery process in step S905, in step S906, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the AT game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining AT mode games. After executing the process of step S906, after executing the process of setting the add-on command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S907, the AT add-on process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command executes processing for performing the add-on notification effect corresponding to the addition performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

Notification of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in the processing of steps S609 to S612 in the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 27). That is, after the AT lottery process and the AT addition process are executed in the process of step S607 or step S608, the process of notifying the pressing order is executed in steps S609 to S612.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the pressing order notification processing executed in steps S609 to S612, an outline of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. will be explained. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 31(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for the pushing hand. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to obtain a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. In addition, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is established when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which the transition to the advantageous section can occur and the pushing order informing is possible is established. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, the interval in which the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner by being easily notified of the operation order of the pressing order bell or the like is defined as an advantageous interval (advantageous state, specific state), and the eighth display segment N8 In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where you can actually get the benefit of the pushing order notification, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section, or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes an indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop button in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

The processing for notifying the pressing order in steps S609 to S612 will be described.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game this time is that the pressing order of the bell has been won. If the pressing order bell wins, it is determined in step S610 whether or not the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set. If any AT mode flag is set, the command monitor 68 is controlled in step S611 so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is performed in accordance with the type of the current pressing order bell. Then, in step S612, after executing a process of setting a pressing order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first minor winning combination as an output target to the display control device 81, the main pressing order notification command is executed. End the process. The display control device 81 that has received this push order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is performed.

If it is determined in step S609 that the bell has not been won in the pressing order, or if none of the AT mode flags have been set in step S610, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode or the like is performed according to the game result of the game.

In the winning result handling process, first, in steps S1001 to S1003, similarly to steps S601 to S603, a process of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is a specific prescribed number is executed. If the number of bets for the current game does not have a specific prescribed number, the process for handling the winning result is terminated without performing the process for the display mode (process related to the instruction function) after step S1004.

If the number of bets for the current game is the specific prescribed number, it is determined in step S1004 whether or not the portent flag is set and the mode is the portent mode. If it is in the portent mode, a process of subtracting 1 from the portent counter is executed in step S1005. Then, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the winning result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, when the omen counter becomes 0, the omen flag is cleared in step S1007. It is determined whether or not it is based on winning the transfer lottery. If the mode is the portent mode based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, AT type determination processing is executed in step S1009.

The AT type determination process in step S1009 is a process of determining whether the AT mode to be started this time is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, AT type lottery processing is performed in step S1101, and which AT mode is selected is determined by lottery. In this lottery process, for example, the current AT mode type is determined by lottery according to the setting value, the previous AT mode type, the number of medals increased during the advantageous interval, the number of games during the advantageous interval, etc., or randomly. . In subsequent step S1102, it is determined whether or not the processing result of step S1101 is the first AT mode. If the current AT mode is determined to be the first AT mode, a process of setting the first AT mode flag is executed in step S1103, and the first AT command is output to the display control device 81 in the subsequent step S1104. After executing the setting process, the AT type determination process ends. Upon receipt of the first AT command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like to perform a notification effect that the AT mode to be started this time is the first AT mode.

If it is the second AT mode instead of the first AT mode at step S1102, a process of setting the second AT mode flag is executed at step S1105, and the second AT command is output to the display control device 81 at step S1106. After executing the setting process, the AT type determination process ends. Upon receiving the second AT command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like to perform a notification effect that the AT mode to be started this time is the second AT mode.

After executing the AT type determination process in the winning result handling process, the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S1010. Then, in step S1011, a process of setting the number of AT mode games is executed. More specifically, in step S1011, a process of inputting "50" as the initial value of the number of AT mode games to the AT game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the AT mode. That is, in this embodiment, the initial number of games is uniformly set to 50 games regardless of the type of AT mode to be started. In the following step S1012, after executing a process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result handling process is terminated. In the display control device 81, based on the reception of the AT start command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled to perform an effect informing that the AT mode is started. When the AT start command is output, the first AT command or the second AT command is output as described above. Along with the notification effect of the start, it is also possible to perform the notification effect of the AT mode type to be started.

If it is determined in step S1008 that the current portent mode is not based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, it means that the current portent mode is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery. means. In this case, a process of clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed in step S1013. Then, in step S1014, a process of setting a CZ mode flag is executed, and in step S1015, a process of setting the number of games in the CZ mode is executed. More specifically, in step S1015, a process of inputting "10" as the initial value of the number of games in the CZ mode to the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. That is, in this embodiment, the CZ mode is uniformly set to continue over 10 games. After that, in step S1016, after executing the process of setting the CZ start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result handling process is ended. In the display control device 81, based on the reception of the CZ start command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled to perform a notification effect that the CZ mode is started.

If the precursor flag is not set in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1017. In step S1017, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode is on by checking the presence or absence of the CZ mode flag. If it is in the CZ mode, a process of subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step S1018. Then, in step S1019, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has reached 0, and if it has not reached 0, the winning result handling process is terminated. If it is 0, the process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S1020, and the process of setting the CZ end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1021. Terminate the corresponding process. When the CZ end command is received, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like to perform notification effects indicating that the CZ mode is ended.

If it is determined in step S1017 that the CZ mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1022. In step S1022, it is determined whether or not the AT mode is on by checking the presence or absence of each AT mode flag. If it is in the AT mode, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT game counter is executed in step S1023. Then, in step S1024, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the winning result handling process is terminated. If it is 0, the process of clearing the current AT mode flag is executed in step S1025, and the process of setting the AT end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S1026. The AT end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode has ended in the current game. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section is also terminated when the AT mode is terminated, and the AT end flag is also a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that one termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. can be done. After that, in step S1027, after executing a process of setting an AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result corresponding process is ended. Upon receiving the AT end command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like to perform a notification effect indicating that the AT mode is ended.

<Management of the number of games in the advantageous section and the number of difference>
Next, a section display first process and a section display second process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator and managing the number of games and the difference number in the advantageous section will be described. .

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 17), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case where, among the advantageous sections, the case is a specific section in which at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S1201 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone winning game flag is set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1203. Then, in step S1204, the advantageous section flag is set. By setting the advantageous section flag, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section. Then, in step S1205, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval, and the process of adding one to each game in the advantageous interval is executed.

In the subsequent step S1206, processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is executed. Advantageous section transition processing is processing related to an instruction function that is performed when a transition to an advantageous section occurs. The advantageous section transition processing will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S1206, the display of a section indicator is started by lighting the 8th display segment N8 in step S1207. In addition, in the main controller 101, when starting to display the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound of "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so as to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Incidentally, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. The configuration may be such that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the notification condition that the pushing order notification can be generated by shifting to the advantageous section is satisfied, and the section indicator starts to display the pushing order notification in the advantageous section. The specific section in which can occur is set to be equal to the advantageous section.

If it is determined in step S1201 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1208 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is continued.

When it is determined in step S1202 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set, and after execution of section indicator display start processing in step S1207, section indicator display continuation processing is executed in step S1208. After that, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification is not performed or medals are not expected to increase even if the pressing order notification is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1209 that the AT mode flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1211. In step S1211, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which an increase in medals can be expected by notification of the pressing order.

After executing the process of step S1210 or step S1211, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1212. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which an increase in medals can be expected due to the press order notification, out of the total number of games. Then, in step S1213, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1212 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. there is

In step S1213, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1212 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display portion 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1213, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1212. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration in which "0" is always displayed by is also possible. A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S416 of the reel control process. etc. (bonus state processing, winning result handling processing) are performed.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S1302, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. After executing the process of step S1302, in step S1303, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S1303, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S1303, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1304, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1305. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, at the start of the AT mode, based on the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of remaining games in the AT mode, etc., even if the AT mode is continued as it is, the AT mode is terminated before the AT mode is terminated. Grasp whether or not the situation reaches the upper limit number of games in the section. In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, when the sum of the expected medal increase number calculated from the number of remaining games in AT mode and the current increase/decrease number MY of the advantageous section exceeds the upper limit increase number (2400). Even if the AT mode is performed as it is, it is grasped whether or not the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is reached before the end condition of the AT mode. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S1306, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or whether or not the number of increased/decreased numbers of advantageous interval games MY has reached the upper limit of the increase in number of 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions are met, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S1307. In the subsequent step S1308, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1309, after performing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the section display second processing ends.

More specifically, the data initialization process in step S1309 is a process of resetting the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. . For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT mode winning flag, the AT mode flag, the CZ mode flag, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY, the sign counter for the sign mode, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, CZ mode, etc., are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. . In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S1306 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S1310, and the AT mode end flag is set. It is determined whether or not the AT mode has ended in the current game by determining whether or not the AT mode has ended. When the AT mode ends, the process advances to step S1307 to perform the processing for ending the advantageous section in steps S1307 to S1309, and then ends the second section display processing.

On the other hand, if the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S1311 whether or not the AT mode is on by checking the presence or absence of each AT mode flag. If the AT mode is not in progress, the section display second process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is in the AT mode, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not the BB game counter is a specific number. As described above, the BB game counter corresponds to the number of games in the first BB state or the second BB state. means that More specifically, since the second interval display process is executed after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, in step S1312, it is determined whether it is the end of the specific number of games in the first BB state or the second BB state. determine whether or not In this embodiment, 1 is set as the specific number, and in step S1312, it is determined whether or not the BB game counter is 1, and whether or not the first game in the first BB state or the second BB state ends. determine whether or not

If it is the end of the first game in the first BB state or the second BB state in the AT mode, the processing for ending the advantageous section in steps S1307 to S1309 is performed, and then the second section display processing is ended. On the other hand, if the AT mode is not in the first BB state or the second BB state, or if the AT mode is in the first BB state or the second BB state but not at the end of the first game, for example, If it is the end of the second game, the second section display process is terminated without proceeding to step S1307.

That is, in the present embodiment, as conditions for ending the advantageous section, in addition to reaching the upper limit number of games (1500 games) or the upper limit increase number (2400 cards), the end of the AT mode, and the first BB state during the AT mode It is also set that it is the end of the first game in the case of shifting to the second BB state. In other words, if the AT mode is shifted to the first BB state or the second BB state, the AT mode will end when the advantageous section ends even if there are remaining games.

As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, even if the AT mode is shifted to the first BB state or the second BB state, the expected medal increase per game does not change. Moreover, as described above, when the AT mode is shifted to the first BB state or the second BB state, regardless of the number of remaining AT mode games, the AT mode ends together with the advantageous section in the first game in that BB state. Therefore, it may not be advantageous for the player to shift to the first BB state or the second BB state during the AT mode. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to make the transition to the first BB state or the second BB state in the AT mode advantageous for the player, the advantageous section transition executed when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed. Time processing is set.

<Processing when transitioning to advantageous section>
Advantageous section transition processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37 . The advantageous section transition process is a process executed in step S1206 in the first section display process, and is a process executed when the start lever 41 is operated to start the game. More specifically, this is a process that is executed when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the lottery result corresponding process of the game to be started.

In step S1401, the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game to be started this time is in either the first BB state or the second BB state. If none of the BB status flags is set, the process advances to step S1402 to perform processing for setting the number of ceiling games in the advantageous section to which the current transition is to be made.

That is, lottery processing for the number of ceiling games is executed in step S1402. In the ceiling game number lottery process, the ceiling game number table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and the current ceiling game number is determined by lottery based on the acquired ceiling game number table. As shown in FIG. 38, the ceiling game number table is set so that one ceiling game number is randomly determined from 100 games to 999 games. , 999 games, the number of games that are likely to be selected is set in units of about 100 games. Also, in the number-of-top-games table, the number of ceiling games that are likely to be selected differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value (the higher the ball-out rate is, the higher the set value is), the shorter the number of ceiling games is likely to be selected. there is

In subsequent step S1403, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the number of ceiling games drawn in step S1402 to the ceiling counter is executed. As already explained, the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is played in the AT lottery process, and when it becomes 0, a transition to the AT mode occurs without going through the AT mode transition lottery. . After that, in step S1404, after executing the process of setting the ceiling command including the information on the number of ceiling games as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the advantageous section transition process ends.

In step S1401, when transitioning to an advantageous section during any BB state, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the BB payout counter is a predetermined specific number. As already explained, the BB payout counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of medals paid out during the BB state, and is used to decide whether or not to end the BB state. In this embodiment, in step S1405, it is determined whether or not the BB payout counter is "7" as the specific number. In other words, in step S1405, it is determined whether or not the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section has been executed in a situation where the number of medals to be paid out in the BB state is seven. When there are 7 cards, it means that either the 1st minor winning combination of the bell in the pressing order or the watermelon (2nd or 3rd minor winning combination) is established only once in the BB state.

If the determination in step S1405 is affirmative and the BB payout counter is the specific number (7), then in step S1406 an AT mode transition lottery process is executed during transition. In this embodiment, when the BB payout counter is a specific number in the advantageous section transition process, the AT mode transition lottery is performed. In other words, when the BB payout counter does not reach the specific number at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the AT mode transition lottery is not executed. The probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery at step S1406 is arbitrary. is set to be

In the subsequent step S1407, it is determined whether or not the transfer lottery in step S1403 has been won. If the BB payout counter is not a specific number in step S1405, or if it is determined that the AT mode transition lottery is not won in step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1402, and the number of ceiling games is set and then advantageous. Terminate section transition processing.

On the other hand, if the BB payout counter is a specific number and the lottery for transition to AT mode is won, the process advances to step S1408 to perform processing for starting the AT mode. That is, in step S1408, AT type determination processing is executed. The AT type determination process is the same as the process of step S1009 (FIG. 34). Then, in step S1409, 50 is input to the AT game counter, and in step S1410, the AT start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this advantageous section transition processing ends. .

That is, in the present embodiment, when a transition to an advantageous section occurs during the BB state, an AT mode transition lottery may be performed using the value of the BB payout counter. The configuration is such that a transition to the AT mode occurs. As described above, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ends in the first game in the first BB state or the second BB state in the AT mode. Therefore, for example, in the first game in the BB state, which is the end game of the advantageous interval, the first minor winning combination is established to cause the payout of seven medals, and the transition to the advantageous interval is caused in the next game. In this case, since the BB payout counter is at the specific number (7), there is a probability of about 33% that a transition to the AT mode will occur. In the AT mode, when the pressing order bell is won, the pressing order notification corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is generated. Therefore, if a transition to any BB state is caused during the AT mode, the BB payout counter is specified. There is a high possibility of causing a transition to an advantageous section in certain situations, and it is possible to reset to the AT mode.

In other words, rather than ending the advantageous section when the number of remaining AT mode games becomes 0, by intentionally making the advantageous section in a situation where the number of remaining AT mode games still exists, it is possible to re-shift to the advantageous section. At this time, there is a possibility that the AT mode is reset. In the present embodiment, such a configuration is used to realize the AT mode continuous property.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1502. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after the processing of step S1502 is executed, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a bet time command, a bet time effect setting process is executed in step S1504. In the effect setting process at the time of betting, a process for controlling the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is performed so that an effect based on the current betting operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, or if the process of step S1504 has been executed, then in step S1505 it is determined whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the command corresponding to the lottery result There are an omen command, an addition command, a push order notification command set in the process (FIG. 25), an AT start command, a ceiling command, etc. set in the first section display process (FIG. 35). In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1506.

If a negative determination is made in step S1505, or if the processing of step S1506 has been executed, it is determined in step S1507 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S1508, effect setting processing at each stop operation is executed. In each stop operation effect setting process, a process for controlling the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is performed so that the effect based on the current stop operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1507, or if the process of step S1508 has been executed, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S417 of the reel control process (FIG. 20). In addition to commands, there are a first AT command, a second AT command, an AT start command, an AT end command, a CZ start command, a CZ end command, etc., which are set in the winning result handling process (FIG. 33). In the case of these all-stop commands, in step S1510, all-stop effect setting processing is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1509, or after the process of step S1510 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1511, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1511, setting effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main controller 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below. It should be noted that each effect setting process will be described with reference to schematic diagrams of display effects shown in FIGS. 44 to 48 and the like.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1506 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1601, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, in step S1603, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is performed.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the lottery result of the current game is not winning the second hand, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning of a specific role. The specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is difficult to appear (hard to win) as a lottery result of each game. Cherry C and watermelon are set. As shown in FIG. 28, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the AT mode transition lottery is set to be easier to win than the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the lottery results other than the specific role. If the lottery result of the game this time is a winning of a special combination, a special combination notification process is executed in step S1605. In the special winning notification processing, control is performed so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are notified that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above special winnings. For example, as shown in FIG. 44(a), three characters of exclamation marks are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in association with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided as the special combination notification. A production is set. As described above, since the probability of winning the AT mode transition differs depending on the type of special role, there is a high level of interest in the type of special role. As a result, it is considered that an attempt is made to determine whether or not the winning is successful.

Here, among the specific roles, especially in Cherry A and Cherry B, and Cherry C, if the former Cherry A and Cherry B are won, the ninth replay winning, which is a weak cherry replay, is possible. However, if the latter cherry C is won, there is a difference that in addition to the weak cherry replay, the 9th regame winning, the strong cherry replay, the 11th regame winning, is possible. Even if there is, there is a common point that it is possible to win a tenth replay, which is a cherry spill replay. In other words, if the 9th re-game win or the 10th re-game win is established, there is a possibility of winning any of Cherry A to Cherry C, and if the 11th re-game win is established, Cherry A to It is determined that the cherry C of the cherry C has been won. In this case, in order to determine which one of cherry A to cherry C has been won, aim at the symbol corresponding to the 11th regame winning prize and stop the corresponding symbol on the effective line to win cherry C. , and if the corresponding symbol does not form an effective line despite being aimed, it can be determined to be Cherry A or Cherry B. On the left reel 32L, the symbol corresponding to the 11th replay win is the "BAR" symbol. That is, in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a Cherry C by performing a stop operation aiming at least the ninth "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L. The stop operation of the left stop switch 42 is performed at the timing when the fifth "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage and the timing when the eighth "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage. In this case, it is possible to stop the "BAR" symbol in the middle stage of the left reel 32L.

On the other hand, when the "white 7", "white shell", and "cherry" symbols from the left stop on the active line, the first BB prize is established, and from the left, the "white 7", "white shell", When the "BAR" symbol stops, the first BB winning is established. A 2BB win cannot be established. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed avoiding the timing at which the 19th "white shell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage and the timing at which the third "white 7" symbol reaches the middle stage, the first BB and the first BB are displayed. 2BB wins cannot be established.

In other words, in the present embodiment, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the operation timing for determining the type of the special combination, it is set so that the 1st BB prize and the 2nd BB prize cannot be established. ing.

If a negative determination is made in step S1602 or step S1604, or after the processing of step S1603 or step S1605 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The AT flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that it is in the AT mode. If it is in the AT mode, AT effect setting processing is executed in step S1607. The AT effect setting process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S1606, or if the process of step S1607 has been executed, the process advances to step S1608. In step S1608, it is determined whether or not a ceiling command has been received as the current start command. If the ceiling command has been received and it is an advantageous interval transition game, in step S1609 an effect setting process for executing an advantageous interval start effect in accordance with the number of ceiling games on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. . As the advantageous section start effect, as shown in FIGS. 45(a) to 45(c), a cut-in effect in which the face of the main character is displayed close-up is set. 45(a) shows a cut-in effect displaying the face of the character, FIG. 45(a) shows a cut-in effect displaying the face of the depressed main character, and FIG. 45(b) displays the face of the main character in high spirits. A cut-in production is shown. In relation to the number of ceiling games, the cut-in effect of FIG. 45(a) is likely to be selected when the number of ceiling games is relatively large, and the cut-in effect of FIG. 45(c) is selected when the number of ceiling games is relatively small. It is set to be easily selected. In other words, each of these advantageous section start effects is a suggestive effect that suggests the number of ceiling games this time, and the player can predict the number of ceiling games in the advantageous section that has shifted this time by the effect at the start of the advantageous section. becomes.

When a negative determination is made in step S1608, or after the processing of step S1609 is executed, BB effect setting processing is executed in step S1610. The BB effect setting process will be described later in detail. After that, in step S1611, after performing setting processing of other effects at the start, the processing of setting effects at the start ends. In step S1611, for example, it is set so that an effect corresponding to the game state is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64, an effect indicating the lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or the start lever 41 is set. A process of notifying that the operation has been accepted by turning off the lamps in the vicinity is performed.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process executed in step S1510 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The all-stop effect setting process is a process for setting an effect to be executed at the end of one game.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command has been received. If the CZ start command has been received, in step S1702 a process of setting a CZ flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. The CZ flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the CZ mode is in progress. (step S1611). In the subsequent step S1703, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the CZ start effect is performed. In the CZ start effect, for example, a character display such as "Enter the chance zone!" to report.

If the CZ start command has not been received in step S1701, the flow advances to step S1704 to determine whether or not the CZ end command has been received. If the CZ end command has been received, then in step S1705 the process of clearing the CZ flag is executed. Then, in step S1706, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the CZ end effect is performed. In the CZ ending effect, for example, characters such as "Chance Zone Ended!!" do.

If the CZ end command has not been received in step S1704, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the AT start command has been received. As already described, in the present embodiment, the AT start command may be output at the end of the omen mode in the winning result handling process on the main control device 101 side at the end of the game, or at the start of the game at the main control device 101. It is also output when winning the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition in the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section on the side. In this case, in step S1707, referring to the command storage area of the RAM 183, it is confirmed whether or not an AT start command has been received not only at the end of the current game (when all games are stopped) but also at the start of the current game. .

If it is determined in step S1707 that an AT start command has been received, then in step S1708 a process of inputting the initial number of AT mode games (50 games) to be started this time to the AT game counter for display is executed. Then, in step S1709, a process of setting an AT flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. As described above, the AT flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the AT mode is in progress. 65 and speaker 64 (step S1611).

In the subsequent step S1710, it is determined whether or not the AT mode to be started this time is the first AT mode by grasping whether or not the first AT command has been received. If it is the first AT mode, in step S1711, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the first AT start effect is performed. On the other hand, in the case of the second AT mode, in step S1712, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second AT start effect is performed. In the first AT start effect and the second AT start effect, characters such as "AT start!" By differentiating the background, characters, etc. between the first AT start performance and the second AT start performance, the AT mode to be started this time is notified so that the player can identify it.

If the AT start command has not been received in step S1707, it is determined in step S1713 whether or not the AT end command has been received. When the AT end command is received, after executing the process of clearing the AT flag in step S1714, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the AT end effect is performed in step S1715. In the AT end effect, for example, characters such as "AT END!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 to inform the player that the AT mode has ended. In addition, in the AT end presentation, it is preferable to notify the payout number and increase number of medals paid out in the AT mode ending this time, the number of continuous AT mode games, etc. together.

If the AT end command has not been received in step S1713, it is determined in step S1716 whether any BB start command has been received. If any BB start command has been received, it is determined in step S1717 whether or not the AT flag is set. If the AT flag is set and the BB prize is won in the AT mode, the advantageous section ends in the next game (the first game in the BB state) as described above. In this case, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the end notice first effect is performed in step S1718. In the end notice first effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(a), characters such as "If the next game is the bell, it's a chance!" When the BB payout counter used in the lottery process for shifting to the AT mode reaches a specific number in the time process, the player is informed that the AT mode may be reset.

If a negative determination is made in step S1717 or after the processing of step S1718 is executed, processing of setting the BB flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step S1718. The BB flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the BB mode is on. In a game started in a state where the BB flag is set, control is performed so that the effect for the BB state is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 (step S1611). However, in this embodiment, even if the BB flag is set, if the CZ flag and AT flag are also set, the effect corresponding to these CZ flag and AT flag is given priority. It is configured to be executed by That is, when the game is in the CZ mode and in the BB state, an effect for the CZ mode is performed, and when the game is in the AT mode and in the BB state, an effect for the AT mode is performed. This is because, as described above, there is no substantial difference in the expected medal increase number in the BB state compared to the carryover state. As a notification of the occurrence of the BB prize, the auxiliary display section 65 may display "777 GET!!" as shown in FIG. 47(a).

If no BB start command has been received in step S1716, it is determined in step S1720 whether any BB end command has been received. If any BB end command has been received, the process of clearing the BB flag is executed in step S1721.

In steps S1703, S1706, S1711, S1712, S1715, S1719, or S1722, after performing other setting processes for all-stop effect, the all-stop effect setting process ends. In step S1722, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or control is performed during replay. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting.

<AT effect setting processing>
Next, the AT effect setting process (step S1607) in the start time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, a process of subtracting 1 from the display AT game counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. In this embodiment, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is displayed as the number of remaining games (see FIG. 46) on the auxiliary display section 65. The display AT game counter is used to display the number of remaining games. is a counter. The CPU 181 controls to update the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 each time the display AT game counter is updated.

After executing the process of step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. If the add-on command has been received, the add-on lottery process is executed in step S1803. In the add-on lottery process, the add-on lottery process is a game subsequent to the game in which the add-on lottery is won, and, for example, after the number of remaining games in the displayed AT mode reaches a predetermined number (one remaining game), the add-on effect is performed ex post facto. It is decided by lottery whether or not to perform a so-called post-adding effect performed in the first game. The winning probability of the additional lottery is arbitrary, but for example, the winning probability of the additional lottery may be different according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the additional winning. It may be possible to make it easier to win the post-addition lottery in the case of winning in addition to a special role (normal replay A to normal replay C) than in the case, or vice versa. Also, the probability of winning the post-addition lottery may be changed according to the set value set in the process of setting the winning probability. may be Further, the odds of winning the post-addition lottery may differ according to the type of AT mode. For example, the second AT mode may be more likely to win the post-addition lottery than the first AT mode, and vice versa. may be

After performing the add-on lottery in step S1803, it is determined whether or not the add-on lottery is won in step S1804. Setting is made so that the additional effect is performed by the auxiliary display part 65 and the speaker 64.例文帳に追加As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 44(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the additional number of games as "+10". In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted. In the following step S1806, the value of the AT game counter for display is updated so that the numerical value corresponding to the addition this time is added.

If it is determined in step S1804 that the post-placement win has been made, a process of setting post-placement flags in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step S1807. The add-on flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the add-on effect should be performed when the number of remaining games in the displayed AT mode reaches a predetermined number, that is, that the add-on effect will be performed after the fact. is a flag. Then, in step S1808, after executing a process of adding the current number of additional games to the post-addition counters provided in the various counter areas 183b, this AT effect setting process is terminated. The post-addition counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games to be added as the post-addition effect. That is, the total value of the post-addition counter value and the display AT game counter value corresponds to the actual number of remaining AT mode games, and is equal to the AT game counter value on the main controller 101 side.

If it is determined in step S1802 that the add-on command has not been received, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not the add-on flag is set. If the post-loading flag is set, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the post-loading counter is a predetermined number of 100 or more. If the post-addition counter is less than 100 and it is confirmed that less than 100 games will be added, it is checked in step S1811 whether or not the display AT game counter is the first predetermined number (11). judge. When the AT game counter for display is the first predetermined number, the processing for clearing the post-addition flag is performed in step S1812, and then the process proceeds to step S1805 to perform the processing for performing the addition effect. On the other hand, even if the add-on flag is set, if the add-on counter is 100 or more and it is confirmed that 100 or more games will be added, the process proceeds to step S1813. , determines whether or not the display AT game counter is a second predetermined number (1) which is set to a value smaller than the first predetermined number. When the AT game counter for display is the second predetermined number, after executing the process of clearing the add-on flag in step S1812, the process proceeds to step S1805 to execute the process for performing the add-on effect. If a negative determination is made in step S1811 or step S1813, and if the game is not a game in which post-adding effects should be performed, the AT effect setting process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the present embodiment, the game in which the post-addition effect is generated differs depending on the number of games added in the post-addition effect. be done.

After updating the display AT game counter in step S1806, it is determined in step S1814 whether or not the post-addition flag is not set and the post-addition counter is greater than zero. The process of step S1814 is a process for determining whether the add-on effect set in step S1805 is based on the current add-on command or as a post-add effect. That is, if the post-addition counter is greater than 0 even though the post-addition flag is not set, it means that the post-addition effect is performed as the post-addition effect. Execute processing to clear the ride counter to 0. When a negative determination is made in step S1814, or after executing the process of step S1815, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

<BB effect setting processing>
Next, the BB effect setting process performed in step S1610 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 40) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the BB flag is set. If the BB flag is not set and the game to be started this time is not in the BB state but in the carry-over state or normal game state, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the AT flag is set. If the AT flag is set, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the AT game counter for display is equal to or less than a predetermined third predetermined number. In this embodiment, 10 is set as the third predetermined number, and in step S1903, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining AT mode games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is 10 games or less. The third predetermined number is set as a number smaller than the first predetermined number (11) determined in step S1811 and greater than the second predetermined number (1) determined in step S1813.

If the display of the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 10 games or less, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the add-on flag is set. The case where the add-on flag is set even though the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 10 games or less means that the add-on effect of 100 games or more is generated as the add-on effect. If the post-loading flag is not set, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the current state is the carryover state. If it is in the carryover state, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a result that allows the carryover BB winning to be established.

As already explained, in the priority setting process (step S313) on the main controller 101 side, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB overlaps with the replay or the minor combination, the replay or the minor combination is preferentially stopped. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled as follows. In other words, the result that can establish the BB prize basically means that the lottery result of the current game is a losing result.

If it is not a losing result, in step S1907, the situation is such that the winning BB should be awarded a prize, and the lottery result of the current game is a result that the BB prize cannot be established. A notification lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute the performance. The winning probability of the information lottery process is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the information lottery is about 1/3. Then, in step S1908, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won, and if the notification lottery has been won, in step S1909, a prize waiting effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. After that, the BB effect setting process is terminated. In the prize waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(a), along with a predetermined character, characters such as "You'll have a chance to win a bonus prize before the end!" The player is notified that the AT mode can be reset due to re-shifting to the advantageous section by establishing a bonus prize.

In step S1906, if the lottery result of the current game is a result that the BB winning that has been carried over can be established, in step S1910, a winning instruction effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. , and then the BB effect setting process is terminated. In the winning instruction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(b), along with a predetermined character, characters such as "Aim!" notification) is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player of the situation in which the BB winning should be established.

On the other hand, if the AT mode is not set in step S1902, if the number of remaining games in AT mode is not equal to or less than the third predetermined number in step S1903, or if the number of remaining games is the third predetermined number in step S1904, Even if it is less than the number, if the post-loading flag is set, if it is in the normal game state before winning the BB at step S1905, or if it is determined that the notification lottery has not been won at step S1908, The BB performance setting processing is terminated as it is without performing the prize waiting performance or the winning instruction performance.

As already explained, in this embodiment, there is no substantial difference in the expected value of medal increase/decrease between the carryover state and the BB state. Since the AT mode ends, basically there is no merit of winning in the BB state. Rather, if you win the BB in a situation where there are still many remaining games in AT mode, even if the AT mode is reset, the remaining AT mode games before resetting will be more than the reset AT mode. In some cases, the number is larger, and a situation that is disadvantageous to the player may occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fact that the BB prize should be established is notified only after the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes small (below the third predetermined number), so that the AT mode is reset. is not disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the probability of losing in each game during the carryover state is set to about 1/5.03. In other words, the number of remaining AT mode games in which the prize waiting effect and the prize instructing effect can occur is a sufficient number of games (approximately 2 in the denominator of the probability) to achieve a lottery result that allows the BB prize to be established. number of games). By doing so, even if an attempt is made to establish a BB prize in the final stage of the AT mode, it is difficult to cause a problem that the AT mode ends without the BB prize being established because the result is not easily lost. becomes possible.

As described above, when it is confirmed that the follow-up effect will occur (if the follow-up flag is set), the number of remaining AT mode games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the actual AT mode is different from the number of remaining games in . In addition, if the number of games to be added in the post-adding effect is less than 100 games, the game (remaining 11 games) before the game (remaining 10 games) in which the winning waiting effect or winning instruction effect will be performed game), a post-loading effect occurs. Therefore, although there are still many remaining games in the AT mode, it is possible to avoid ending the AT mode by establishing a BB prize.

On the other hand, if the number of games to be added in the post-adding effect is 100 games or more, even if the game (remaining 10 games) in which the prize waiting effect or the prize instructing effect is performed, Winning waiting effect and winning instruction effect do not occur. In other words, even though the number of remaining games displayed in the AT mode is less than or equal to the third predetermined number, it is expected that the additional effect of 100 games or more will occur through the fact that the prize waiting effect and the prize instructing effect do not occur. It is possible to

However, the prize waiting effect is not executed unless the notification lottery is won even in a situation where the post-loading flag is not set. In other words, even if the number of remaining games displayed in AT mode is 10 games or less, the prize waiting effect does not occur. Become.

In addition, since the winning instruction performance is configured to be executed without going through the notification lottery, the BB winning cannot be established even though the additional performance is not scheduled, and the AT mode is reset. It is avoided to miss the chance to make it. In other words, when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is displayed as 10 games or less, and the lottery result of the game is a losing result, and the prize-winning instruction effect is generated, it is confirmed that the additional effect is not forthcoming, and conversely. , when the number of remaining games displayed is 10 games or less and the winning instruction performance is not generated in spite of the fact that the player has lost the game, it is determined that the additional performance is coming. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically increase the interest in the game after the display of the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 10 games or less.

If the BB flag is set in step S1901 and the state is BB, the process proceeds to step S1911. In step S1911, a process of adding 1 to the BB game number counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The BB game number counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games in the BB state, and corresponds to the BB game counter on the main control device 101 side. In the following step S1912, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set.If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not the BB game number counter is 1 in step S1913. That is, it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is the first game in the BB state in the AT mode. If the AT mode is not on, or if the AT mode is on but not the first game in the BB state, the first processing for the BB effect is terminated.

As already explained, when the transition to the BB state occurs during the AT mode, the end notice first effect is performed as the effect when the game is completely stopped (step S1718, FIG. 47(a)). The affirmative determination in step S1913 is the start of the next game after the end notice first effect. In this case, in step S1914, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game indicates that the pressing order of the bell is won. If the pressing order bell is won, in step S1915, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second end notice effect is performed, and then the first process for BB effect is terminated. In the end notice second effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(b), characters such as "You did it!" ) to notify the success. Note that the second end notice effect is executed so as not to overlap with the pressing order notification effect, and even if the second end notice effect is being performed, the player can easily grasp the pressing order corresponding to the first minor combination. is set to be

If a negative determination is made in step S1914 and the lottery result of the current game is not the pressing order bell, then in step S1916 the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the end notice third effect is performed, After that, the first process for BB effects is terminated. In the end notice third effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 48(a), characters such as "Don't give up yet!" It is notified that there is still a chance of setting the BB payout counter to a specific number (7) although the winning order of the bell is not won. That is, in the present embodiment, if the lottery result of the game is watermelon winning, and if the second minor winning combination or the third minor winning combination can be established, seven medals are paid out, and in this case, the BB payout counter is set. A specific number can be set (FIG. 48(b)). Therefore, even if the lottery result of the first game in the BB state is not winning the push order bell, there is a chance to receive the AT mode transition lottery during the transition process in the advantageous section transition process, until the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop. Expectation can be maintained.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the current game is a losing result, or if one of the replay results wins, the BB payout counter cannot be set to a specific number. At the time of transition, the AT mode transition lottery cannot be accepted (Fig. 48(c)).

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the BB state, the probability of winning the bell in the pressing order is about 1/1.5, and the probability of winning the watermelon is about 1/219. In some cases, the BB payout counter reaches a specific number, and an AT mode transition lottery is executed at the time of transition. Then, since the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery at the time of the transition is about 1/3, when the BB is won during the AT mode, the AT mode has a probability of about 1/4.5. will be reset.

By the way, even when the bell is won in the order of pressing, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated according to the notification of the order of pressing, instead of winning the 1st minor role, the 4th minor role to the 27th minor role will be won. is established or the BB payout counter becomes a number different from the specific number (0, 1). In addition, even if the watermelon is won, neither the second minor winning prize nor the third minor winning prize can be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and in the case of a so-called dropout, BB payout is made. The counter will be a number different from the specified number (0). In these cases, the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is not executed. Therefore, more cautious operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is urged, making it possible to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by doing so, it is possible to avoid the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition even when the player wants to end the AT mode, and the game is started by the player's operation. It is possible to realize the continuous playability of the AT mode to the extent that the real pleasure of the so-called slot machine, in which the game is ended by the player's operation, is not lost.

It should be noted that, when the specific combination is won in the first game in the BB state in the AT mode, the execution of the specific combination notification effect (step S1605) may be restricted. By doing so, before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it becomes difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the game is a result of losing the game or whether it is a special role, and the third end notice effect is performed. In this case, it is possible to enhance the effect of sustaining the expectation of winning the watermelon.

<Relationship between the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition and the BB payout counter>
The relationship between the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition and the BB payout counter in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

For example, when the transition to the advantageous section occurs at the timing t1, which is not the BB state, the number of top games is set without executing the AT mode transition lottery during the transition in the advantageous section transition process. If a transition to any of the BB states occurs at timing t2 before shifting to the AT mode, end processing of the advantageous section is not executed at timing t3, which is the first game in the BB state. In addition, since the AT mode is not in progress, the pressing order notification effect does not occur, and even if the pressing order bell is won during the BB state, unless the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 coincides with the first minor winning combination, the first. Winning a small role will not be established.

The BB state ends when the number of medals paid out during the BB state reaches a predetermined number or more. The BB payout counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for ending the BB state is satisfied. The number of medals will be added. Then, at timing t5 when the BB payout counter reaches a predetermined number (71) or more, the BB state ends.

Also, in the advantageous section, if the transition to AT mode occurs at the timing of t6, and the number of remaining AT mode games becomes 0 at the timing of t7, or if the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is reached, The advantageous section ends when the AT mode ends. In the normal section, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and by winning the transition lottery, the transition to the advantageous section occurs. The advantage zone transition lottery is performed with lottery results other than the common bell, and the winning probability is 100%, so the transition to the advantage zone occurs in a relatively small number of games. For example, when a shift to the advantageous section occurs at the timing of t8, since the BB state is not in effect at that timing, the AT mode transition lottery process at the time of transition is not executed as at the timing of t1, and the ceiling game number is set. is done.

Assume that the transition to the AT mode occurs at the timing of t9, and the transition to the BB state occurs at the timing of t10 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes small. In this case, the advantageous section ends and the AT mode ends at the timing of t11, which is the end of the first game in the BB state. For example, if the lottery result of the 1st game in the BB state is winning the push order bell, since the AT mode is not yet finished, the push order notification effect is generated, and the first minor winning combination can be established. . Then, when the advantageous section ends at the timing of t11, the BB payout counter becomes 7.

The BB payout counter is special information that is not subject to initialization processing at the end of the advantageous interval, and is maintained even at the timing of t12 when re-shifting to the advantageous interval occurs. Then, when the advantageous interval transition processing is executed at the timing of t12, it is an advantageous interval transition in the BB state, and since the BB payout counter is 7, which is a specific number, the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition. is executed, a transition to the AT mode occurs with a probability of about one-third. Then, at the timing of t13 when the BB payout counter reaches 71, the BB state ends. At the end of the BB state, initialization processing of the BB payout counter is executed, and at the timing of t13, the BB payout counter becomes 0 which is the initial value.

As described above, according to the present embodiment described in detail, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the BB payout counter updated according to the progress of the game in the first BB state or the second BB state is used for the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the game property of shifting to the BB state based on the winning of the BB and the transition to the advantageous section. Based on the winning, it can be associated with a game that shifts to an advantageous section in which push order notification can occur. By doing so, the BB state that progresses in parallel and the advantageous section are associated with the playability, and the interest in the game is improved.

The BB payout counter is updated according to the game result of each game in the bonus state process regardless of whether or not there is a shift to the advantageous section. More specifically, the BB payout counter is set according to the game result of each game, whether the game is a game in which advantageous interval transition processing is performed, a game in an advantageous interval, or a game in a normal interval. is a counter that is updated every The BB payout counter is a counter that is not subject to initialization processing of the advantageous interval information at the end of the advantageous interval. By using such a counter, it is possible to associate the game that progresses in parallel with the advantageous section regardless of the advantageous section. It is also possible to take over the game information during the advantageous interval to the succeeding advantageous interval.

By configuring the advantageous section to end in the first game of the BB state, which is the game preceding the game in which the BB state ends, if the advantageous section transition lottery is won during the BB state, it is advantageous in the BB state. A re-transition to the interval will occur. By doing so, it is possible to associate one advantageous section with a subsequent advantageous section using a counter that is updated in one BB state.

In the present embodiment, the advantageous section ends at the first game in the BB state that is shifted to the AT mode. By doing so, it is possible to make the BB payout counter more likely to reach a specific number when the advantageous section ends. That is, when the first game in the BB state that has shifted to the AT mode is won by the bell in the pressing order, since the first game in the BB state is in the AT mode, the pressing order notification corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is issued. Occur. Therefore, when the advantageous section ends in the first game in the BB state, the BB payout counter becomes 7 as a specific number. By doing so, the BB payout counter is set to a specific number by using the push order notification, and the BB payout counter is used in the next advantageous section transition process. It is possible to associate the advantageous sections of

Then, if the BB payout counter is 7, an AT mode transition lottery for transition is executed in the advantageous section transition processing, and by winning the transition lottery, the AT mode is reset. In other words, even if the BB payout counter is 7, it is not always reset to AT mode, but is reset after the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition, thereby enhancing the consecutiveness of AT mode. It is possible to improve the soundness of the game without overdoing it.

When the advantageous section ends in the first game of the BB state shifted to AT mode, the lottery result of the game is not the winning order of the bell, but the winning or losing result as a replay result. In this case, the BB payout counter does not reach the specific number, and the advantageous section ends as it is. In this case, the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is not performed in the next advantageous section transition process. By doing so, it is possible to draw a great deal of attention to the lottery result of the first game in the BB state when the player is shifted to the BB state during the AT mode.

Even if the first game in the BB state wins the bell in the pressing order and the notification of the pressing order is generated, a game that does not comply with the notification of the pressing order and does not allow the establishment of the first minor winning combination is allowed. ing. In addition, even if the first game in the BB state wins the watermelon, a game in which neither the second minor winning prize nor the third minor winning prize corresponding to the watermelon is established and the game is missed is allowed. ing. By adopting such a configuration, careful operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is encouraged in the first game in the BB state, and the interest in the game is improved.

Furthermore, if the transition to the BB state is not caused when the AT mode ends, the advantageous section ends as it is when the AT mode ends, and the AT mode transition lottery at the next advantageous section transition is not executed. That is, as described above, in a game in which the advantageous section is terminated based on the player's operation, and the AT mode is reset at the time of transition to the advantageous section based on the player's operation, the termination of the advantageous section and the AT mode are performed. can be freely reset according to the player's will. By doing so, the game is started based on the player's operation, and the game is ended based on the player's operation. It is possible to realize the playability of making a set.

Also, even if an attempt is made to cause a transition to the BB state at the end of the AT mode, the transition to the BB state cannot be made unless the outcome is such that a BB prize can be established. Therefore, depending on the lottery result of each game in the final stage of the AT mode, the AT mode may end without causing a transition to the BB state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the playability in the final stage of the AT mode.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the conditions for executing the AT mode transition lottery upon transition are different from those in the first embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 50, the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given in this modified example and the changes in the lottery table will be described.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), in this modification, the privilege given when the second minor winning prize is established and the privilege given when the third minor winning prize is established are the above-mentioned first 1 embodiment. That is, in this modified example, five medals are paid out when the second minor combination is won, and three medals are paid out when the third minor combination is won. In addition, as shown in FIG. 50(b), in this modification, the corresponding hand when watermelon is won is different. The third minor winning combination cannot be established. Accordingly, a winning combination with an index value IV of 26 is set, and if a winning combination is won with the index value IV of 26, the third minor winning combination can be established. The index value IV=23 is set to be easier to win than the index value IV=26, and the second minor winning combination is more likely to be established than the third minor winning combination.

Advantageous section transition processing in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51 .

The processing for setting the number of ceiling games in steps S2001 to S2003 is the same as the processing in steps S1402 to S1404. In this modification, first, in step S2004, a process of acquiring a lottery table for transition to AT mode from the various table storage area 105a is executed. As shown in FIG. 50(c), the AT mode transition lottery table for transition is set so that the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery for transition differs according to the value of the BB payout counter. Specifically, when the BB payout counter is 7, the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 20%, and when the BB payout counter is 5, the AT mode transition is won with a 50% probability. is 3, it is set to win the AT mode transition with a probability of 80%.

As described above, the case where the BB payout counter is 7 means that the lottery result of the first game in the BB state has won the first minor winning combination, and the case where the BB payout counter is 5 means the second minor winning combination. This is the case where the winning combination is established, and the case where the BB payout counter is 3 means the case where the third minor winning combination is established. In other words, the setting is such that the harder it is to win in the first game in the BB state, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery.

In addition, in the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition in this modified example, a case where the BB payout counter is 0 as an initial value is also set. Then, when the BB payout counter is 0, it is set so as not to win the AT mode shift. In other words, if the first game in the BB state is a losing result or a replay result, the lottery for transition to AT mode is not won.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table at step S2004, the process of grasping the BB payout counter is executed at step S2005, and the AT mode transition lottery process at transition is executed at step S2006. Then, in step S2007 it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition is elected, and if it is elected, the AT mode start processing is executed in steps S2008 to S2010, and then the advantageous section Terminate migration processing. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition is not won, the process advances to step S2001 to set the number of ceiling games, and then terminates the advantageous section transition processing.

Here, in the advantageous section transition processing in this modification, the processing for determining whether or not the transition to the advantageous section occurred during the BB state (step S1401) is not set, and the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is not set. (Step S2006) is executed regardless of whether it is in the BB state. As described above, in this modified example, the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is executed using the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition. 0), it is set so as not to win AT mode transition. Since the BB payout counter is set to the initial value at the end of the BB state, the BB payout counter is always the initial value except in the BB state. Therefore, when the transition to the advantageous section occurs in a state other than the BB state, although the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is executed, the AT mode transition lottery is not won. By doing this, regardless of the state at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section becomes a common processing configuration, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration of the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section.

In other words, the BB payout counter is used to execute the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition as a process related to the instruction function, and if the BB payout counter is a specific number of 7, the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is won. While the BB payout counter can be updated to 7 as a specific number in the BB state, it is not updated to 7 as a specific number in states other than the BB state. In this way, in order to win the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition, it becomes necessary to perform the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition during the BB state, and the superiority of the BB state is favorably improved. can be increased.

Although the BB payout counter is not updated even if a small win such as a push-order bell is established in a normal game state or carry-over state other than the BB state, winning of the push-order bell is achieved in the BB state, normal game state, or carry-over state. The probability and benefits (number of medals) given at the time of winning are the same. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the superiority of the BB state with a configuration that is completely different from the conventional configuration, such as increasing the superiority of the BB state by the winning probability of the small winning combination and the privilege given. It becomes possible, and it can greatly contribute to the realization of novel game characteristics.

The BB payout counter is updated by winning any minor combination, and when the BB payout counter reaches the maximum number of payouts (71) due to the winning of a minor combination, the BB state ends. By doing so, the content of the game in which the BB payout counter is set to a specific number and the content of the game in which the BB state ends are made common, and the degree of attention to the game in which a small winning combination is won during the BB state is preferably increased. becomes possible.

Whether or not the BB payout counter is updated to the specific number at the end of the advantageous section is determined by configuring the advantageous section to end regardless of whether or not the BB payout counter is updated to the specific number in the first game in the BB state. It is possible to attract a great deal of interest in Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the end game of the advantageous section.

In this modified example, game results with different numbers of payouts are provided, and in the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is changed according to the value of the BB payout counter. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game result of the first game. Therefore, it is possible to greatly improve the playability in performing the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition using the BB payout counter.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the execution timing of the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section is made different. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the first section display process in this modified example.

In this modification, if it is determined in step S2101 that the section indicator is not being displayed, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. When the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, the advantageous zone flag is set in step S2102, and the measurement start processing of the number of games AG in the advantageous zone is executed in step S2103. Then, in step S2104, display of the section indicator is started. That is, in this modification, the advantageous interval transition process is not performed in the advantageous interval transition game.

On the other hand, in this modification, if it is determined in step S2101 that the section indicator is being displayed, in step S2106 it is determined whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. , in step S2107, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed. Then, in step S2108, processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is executed.

The advantageous section transition processing in this modification is the same as the advantageous section transition processing (FIG. 51) of Modification 1 described above. However, as shown in FIG. 53, the value of the BB payout counter is set as a value for two games in the BB state in the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition in this modified example. That is, a case where the value of the BB payout counter is 7, a case where it is 8, and a case where it is 14 are set.

As described above, when the advantageous section ends in the first game in the BB state in the AT mode, the winning order of the bell is won in the first game in the BB state. When the counter reaches 7, the advantageous section ends. Then, even if the advantageous zone flag is set in the next game, the push order notification does not occur in the game, and even if the push order bell is won, there are cases where the first minor winning combination cannot be established. be. In other words, when the BB payout counter is 7, the 1st minor win is established in the 1st game in the BB state where the advantageous interval ends, and the 2nd game in the BB state in which the advantageous interval flag is set loses. , a win as a result of a replay, or a small win that has been won, and a case where the BB payout counter is 8 means that the first small win is established in the first game in the BB state, and the BB state wins. In the second game, when the bell was won in the pressing order, the 1st minor winning combination could not be established, and the 4th through 27th minor winning combinations could be established, and the BB payout counter was 14. , means that the winning of the first minor winning combination is successful in the first game and the second game in the BB state.

In the lottery table for shifting to AT mode in this modified example, if the BB payout counter is 7 or 8, and at least the first minor winning combination can be established in the advantageous section ending game, the probability is 30%. When the AT mode transition is won, the BB payout counter is 14, and not only the advantageous zone ending game but also the next game can establish the first minor winning prize, the BB payout counter is 7 or 8. It is set so that the AT mode transition wins with a probability of 60%, which is higher than the case.

When a negative determination is made in step S2106, or after the processing of step S2108 is executed, display continuation processing of the section indicator is performed in step S2109. The processing of steps S2109 to S2114 is the same as the processing of steps S1208 to S1213.

That is, in this modified example, the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous interval is configured to be executed at the start of the game following the game that has transitioned to the advantageous interval. In other words, the advantageous section transition process is executed at the start of the first game after transitioning to the advantageous section.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured such that the advantageous interval flag can be set in the game following the game in which the advantageous interval ends. If the set game is also a game in the advantageous interval, there may be no game in the normal interval between the advantageous intervals. Assuming that the game in which the advantageous interval flag is set is the game in the normal interval, the advantageous interval transition processing is executed in the game in the normal interval, and the push order notification as an instruction function may occur. The significance of distinguishing between an advantageous interval in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed and a normal interval in which no notification of the pushing order as an instruction function occurs and a normal interval in which processing related to the instruction function is not executed may be lost. do not have.

In this respect, as in the above modified example, by adopting a configuration in which the advantageous interval transition processing is executed in the next game in which the advantageous interval flag is set, even if the game in which the advantageous interval flag is set is set as the normal interval, The advantageous section transition processing is configured to be performed during the advantageous section, and the advantageous section transition processing can be preferably performed while ensuring the significance of distinguishing between the advantageous section and the normal section.

In the advantageous interval transition process, a process of setting the ceiling number of games in the advantageous interval to be transitioned can be executed. If the number of ceiling games is determined during the normal section, the determined number of ceiling games will result in an advantage/disadvantage in the normal section, which is not preferable. In this regard, in this modified example, since it is configured such that the number of ceiling games is set after shifting to the advantageous section more reliably, it is possible to prevent situations in which there is an advantage/disadvantage in the normal section. It becomes possible to

In addition, in the advantageous section transition process, an AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition may be executed to determine whether or not the advantageous section to be transitioned is to be transitioned to the AT mode. If it is determined during the normal section that the AT mode is to start the advantageous section, the normal section will have an advantage/disadvantage, which is not preferable. In this regard, in this modification, since it is configured to cause the transition to the AT mode after more reliably transitioning to the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the situation in which there is an advantage/disadvantage in the normal section. becomes possible.

At the start of the next game in which the advantageous section flag is set, the advantageous section transition processing is performed, so that the advantageous section can be achieved in the shortest possible time after reliably transitioning to the advantageous section and after transitioning to the advantageous section. It becomes the structure which performs a process at the time of area transition, and it becomes possible to eliminate the situation as much as possible that the process at the time of an advantageous area transition is not performed, although it has transitioned to an advantageous area.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, although the advantageous interval transition processing is performed in the game in which the advantageous interval flag is set, it is configured to be performed at the end of the game. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the first section display process in this modification, and FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the second section display process in this modification.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the first interval display process in this modification, if it is determined in step S2201 that the interval indicator is not being displayed, in step S2202 it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval winning game flag is set. determine whether If the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, the advantageous zone flag is set in step S2203, the measurement start processing of the number of games AG in the advantageous zone is executed in step S2204, and the display of the zone indicator is started in step S2205. Execute the process. Further, if the section display is being displayed in step S2201, display continuation processing is executed in step S2206. The processing of steps S2207 to S2211 is the same as the processing of steps S1209 to S1213.

That is, in this modified example, the advantageous section transition process is not performed in the first section display process executed at the start of the game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, in the second section display process in this modified example, if the advantageous section flag is set in step S2301, the advantageous section winning game flag is set in step S2302. determine whether or not there is If the advantageous section winning game flag is set and the advantageous section flag is set at the start of the game to be ended this time, the process advances to step S2303 to clear the advantageous section winning game flag, and then the advantageous section winning game flag is cleared in step S2304. Execute section transition processing. The advantageous interval transition processing in step S2304 is the same as the advantageous interval transition processing in Modification 2, and the AT mode transition lottery table for transition is also the same as the table in Modification 2 (FIG. 53).

If a negative determination is made in step S2302, or after the process of step S2304 is executed, various processes during the advantageous section are executed in steps S2305 to S2315. The processing of steps S2305 to S2315 is the same as the processing of steps S1302 to S1312.

By doing so, when a game started in a situation where the advantageous interval flag is set is regarded as an advantageous interval, and a game started in a situation where the advantageous interval flag is not set is regarded as a normal interval, the advantageous interval flag is set. By the time the game is started in the situation where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the game is started, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section is performed.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition differs depending on the type of BB state when the advantageous section transition process is executed. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing processing when transitioning to an advantageous section in this modified example.

In this modified example, compared with the advantageous section transition process of Modified Example 1, steps S2401 to S2405 and steps S2407 to S2411 are the same as steps S2001 to S2010, and step S2405 After the BB payout counter is grasped in step S2406, confirmation processing of each BB state flag is executed.

FIG. 57(a) shows an AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition in this modified example. In this modified example, if the BB payout counter is a specific number of 7, then the AT mode transition is won with a predetermined probability, and if the BB payout counter is any other value, the AT mode transition is not won. When the BB payout counter is 7, if the BB state is the 1st BB state, the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 20%, and if the BB state is the 2nd BB state, the AT mode transition is won with a 50% probability. , the second BB state is set to have a higher probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition than the first BB state.

As already explained, in this embodiment, any BB state is set so that there is no substantial difference in the degree of advantage compared to the carry-over state. It is assumed that the game is played in the carry-over state regardless of the presence or absence of transition. However, as mentioned above, from the point of view of resetting the AT mode advantageously, it is better to proceed with the AT mode while the second BB win is carried over rather than proceed with the AT mode while the first BB win is carried over. is advantageous for the player.

Since the player may suffer a disadvantage if the BB winning is established before the situation where the AT mode should be reset occurs after the shift to the AT mode occurs, the second BB winning is carried over. The case where the AT mode can proceed in the state where the AT mode is reset means that the second BB is won after the AT mode is reset during the BB state and the BB state ends, or the transition to the AT mode occurs. The main pattern is one of the states in which the second BB winning is carried over from the previous one.

That is, after the BB is won at the end of the AT mode and the AT mode is reset, if the BB state ends during the AT mode, the AT mode is reset according to the type of BB that is subsequently won. It becomes possible to vary the probabilities, and to provide new amusement during the AT mode.

Also, before shifting to the AT mode, it is possible to grasp the type of winning BB by performing a stop operation aiming at winning a BB in a game that results in a loss. That is, if the stop operation is aimed at the 1BB winning and the 1BB winning is established, the 1BB winning is carried over, and if the 1BB winning is not established, the 2BB winning is carried over or before the BB winning. It is either in the normal game state. Since the 1BB win and the 2BB win do not overlap, if the 1BB win is carried over, it is better to let the 1BB win and quickly digest the 1BB state. , is preferable for the player from the viewpoint of obtaining a chance of winning the 2nd BB.

Here, when the first BB state is completed in the AT mode, the probability of winning the first small winning combination of 7 payouts is about 1/1.5, so the first BB state is about 15 games. can be terminated. On the other hand, when the 1st BB state is completed in non-AT mode, the 1st minor winning combination with 7 payouts occurs with a probability of about 1/9, and the 4th minor winning combination with 1 payout occurs. ~ Since the probability of winning the 27th minor role is about 1/2.4, it is possible to end the 1st BB state in about 55 games, and the 1st BB state ends compared to AT mode. will require a lot of games.

Then, when it is found that the first BB winning is carried over before the shift to the AT mode, the first BB state is terminated as soon as possible after shifting to the first BB state, and the state of carrying over the second BB winning is restored. It is possible to add interest to the game before shifting to the AT mode, such as aiming. In this case, as described above, even if any BB win is carried over, there is no difference in the degree of advantage in each game before the shift to the AT mode, and any BB state is considered to be a carryover state. Even if compared, there is no difference in the advantage in each game if it is before the shift to AT mode. Therefore, while avoiding differences in the advantages of each game before shifting to the AT mode, it is possible to make differences in the advantages after the transition to the AT mode occurs. While concentrating the player's attention on the AT mode, it is possible to maintain the player's interest even if there is no difference in the degree of advantage.

Moreover, when the first BB state is completed before shifting to the AT mode, in order to end the first BB state as early as possible, a game in which the player wins the first minor combination by relying on his or her own intuition when the bell is won in order of pushing is recommended. It is possible to do it. In this way, the advantage of establishing the first minor winning combination when the bell is won in the pushing order can be obtained in addition to the increase in the number of medals held, and the game performance before shifting to the AT mode can be further improved. It becomes possible.

In the AT type determination process (step S2409) of the advantageous section transition process, the AT mode selection rate may be varied according to the type of BB state. FIG. 57(b) is a diagram showing an example of an AT type lottery table. In FIG. 57(b), when the advantageous section transition processing is performed during the first BB state, the second AT mode is more likely to be selected than the first AT mode, and the advantageous section transition processing is performed during the second BB state. When the processing is performed, the first AT mode is more likely to be selected than the second AT mode.

As described above, the second AT mode is set so that the winning probability of the additional lottery is higher than the first AT mode, and the second AT mode is an AT mode that is more advantageous for the player than the first AT mode. I can say. That is, in this example, the second AT mode is more likely to be selected in the AT type determination process in the first BB state than in the second BB state. is more advantageous for the player.

Since the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is higher in the second BB state than in the first BB state, when the advantageous section transition processing is performed in the first BB state, the AT mode While it is difficult to win the transition, the second AT mode is likely to be selected, and when the advantageous section transition processing is performed in the second BB state, it is easy to win the AT mode transition, but the second AT mode is less likely to be selected. In this manner, it is possible to provide special features to the AT mode according to the type of BB state in which the advantageous section transition processing is performed. In this way, for example, a player who wants to aim for the second AT mode even if it is difficult to win an AT mode shift win will want to win the first BB, and it is possible to meet the various needs of players.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the rate of occurrence of the pressing order notification for the first game in the BB state differs depending on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing in this modification.

In this modification, when the bell is won in the pressing order (step S2509: YES) and any AT mode flag is set (step S2510: YES), the subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment. It is different from the lottery result handling process, and other processes (steps S2501 to S2508) are the same as the corresponding processes (steps S601 to S608) in the first embodiment.

That is, in this modification, if the pressing order bell is won during the AT mode, it is determined in step S2511 whether or not any BB state flag is set. If it is set, it is determined whether or not the BB game counter is 0 in step S2512. As already explained, the BB game counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 in the bonus state process, and the bonus state process is executed at the end of the game (step S414). On the other hand, the lottery result handling process is a process executed at the start of the game (step S310). That is, when the BB state flag is set and the BB game counter is 0 in step S2512, it means that the first game in the BB state is started, and the advantageous section ends in the game. means to

If it is the first game in the BB state in the AT mode, the notification lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a in step S2513, and the notification lottery process is executed in step S2514. Then, in step S2515, it is determined whether or not it is a notification winning, and if it is a notification winning, the pressing order notification corresponding to the first minor combination is performed in step S2516, and the pressing order notification command is issued in step S2517. After executing the setting process, the lottery result corresponding process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2511 or step S2512, the process advances to step S2516 without going through the notification lottery, and executes processing for performing push order notification.

As shown in FIG. 59, the notification lottery table in this modification has different probability of winning notification according to the value of the AT game counter, and the smaller the value of the AT game counter, the easier it is to win the notification. . For example, if the remaining number of games in AT mode is 5-9, the winning probability is 80%. becomes. In other words, even if the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 10 and a prize waiting effect or a prize instructing effect occurs, it is better to postpone the BB prize as much as possible so that the push order notification will occur more easily in the first game in the BB state. It becomes easier to succeed in resetting the AT mode. However, since it is possible to win the BB prize in a game that is a losing result, if the BB prize is prolonged too much, the AT mode may end without the BB prize being awarded. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to provide an exciting game such as at what timing the BB prize is established in relation to the reset rate of the AT mode and the number of remaining games until the end of the AT mode. Become.

In addition, in the notification lottery table in this modification, the higher the value of the AT game counter, the easier it is to win the notification. For example, if the number of AT mode initial games (50 games) or more, the probability is 50% It is set to be a notification winning. By doing so, it is possible to compensate for the case where the BB prize is established unintentionally in a situation such as the beginning of the AT mode where there are still many remaining games in the AT mode.

<Modification 6>
In this modification, if it is known in advance that the advantageous interval will end when the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number is reached, the occurrence rate of the push order notification in the first game in the BB state will be different. Configuration. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the remaining game number management process, and FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the remaining number management process. These remaining game number management process and remaining number management process are processes (steps S1304 and S1305) executed in the second section display process (FIG. 36).

In the number-of-remaining-games management process, the number of games AG in the advantageous section is confirmed in step S2601, and the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section is executed. In the subsequent step S2602, the AT game counter is checked to determine the number of AT mode remaining games (G1). In the following step S2603, for example, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the number of remaining games in the specialized zone, etc., or the number of remaining games (G2) in the mode already scheduled during the advantageous interval is executed. Then, in step S2604, the number of games in the advantageous interval (GS) is calculated by adding the number of games in the advantageous interval AG, the number of remaining games in the AT mode (G1), and the number of other remaining games (G2). Execute the processing to be performed.

In step S2605, it is determined whether or not the scheduled number of games to be completed (GS) calculated in step S2604 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games (1500) in the advantageous section. If it is 1500 or more, it is determined in step S2606 whether or not the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that even if the AT mode or the like is executed as it is, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval will be reached without completing all the remaining number of games. If the first excess flag is not set, the first excess flag is set in step S2607, and the process of setting the first excess command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S2608. After that, the remaining game number management process is terminated. The first excess command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the first excess flag has been set. If a negative determination is made in step S2605, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, the remaining game number management process ends.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in FIG. 61, first, in step S2701, the process of grasping the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is executed. In the subsequent step S2702, the expected increase in medals (expected increase in number, M1) for the number of remaining games in AT mode (G1) grasped in step S2602 is calculated as the expected increase in medals per game in AT mode. Execute processing to calculate from the number (net increase number). In step S2703, the expected increase in medals (expected increase in number, M2) for the number of other remaining games (G2) grasped in step S2603 is compared with the expected increase in medals per game for other games. (net increase in number of sheets). Then, in step S2704, by adding the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY, the expected increase/decrease number in AT mode (M1), and the expected increase/decrease number in other games (M2), the planned increase/decrease number (MS) is calculated. Execute the process of calculating

In step S2705, it is determined whether or not the planned increase/decrease number of sheets (MS) calculated in step S2704 is equal to or greater than the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section. If it is 2400 or more, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that even if the AT mode or the like is executed as it is, there is a high possibility that the upper limit increase number of the advantageous interval will be reached without completing the remaining number of games. If the second excess flag is not set, the second excess flag is set in step S2707, and the process of setting the second excess command to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S2708. After that, the remaining number management process is terminated. The second excess command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the second excess flag has been set. If a negative determination is made in step S2705 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, the remaining number management processing ends.

In this modified example, as in modified example 5 above, when the push order bell is won in the first game in the BB state in the AT mode, the push order notification is executed through the notification lottery. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62, in the notification lottery table in this modified example, the probability of winning notification is set differently depending on the presence or absence of the first excess flag and the second excess flag. Specifically, when none of the excess flags is set, the probability of winning is 50%, while when both excess flags are set, the probability of winning is 10%. In the situation where the upper limit is likely to be reached both from the perspective of the number of medals and the number of medals, the occurrence rate of the notification of the pressing order in the first game in the BB state is low. By doing so, it is possible to ensure the significance of setting the upper limit on the advantageous section by lowering the continuous property.

On the other hand, when the first excess flag is set and the second excess flag is not set, the probability of winning is 80%, which is higher than when none of the excess flags is set. In the BB state, notification of the pressing order in the first game is likely to occur. When the first excess flag is set and the second excess flag is not set, it is predicted that although the upper limit number of games will be reached, the upper limit increase number will not be reached. For example, when a large number of games are required from the transition to the advantageous section to the transition to AT mode, there is a possibility that many medals cannot be obtained at the time of forced termination of the advantageous section. . Therefore, by setting the occurrence rate of the pressing order notification in the first game in the BB state to a high value as described above, the reset rate of the AT mode can be increased, and the player's sense of loss can be well compensated for. .

On the other hand, if the first excess flag is not set but the second excess flag is set, there is a probability of 5% that the winning will be announced, and the BB state 1 will be higher than the case where none of the excess flags are set. This makes it difficult for notification of the pressing order of game items to occur. When the first excess flag is not set and the second excess flag is set, it is predicted that the upper limit increase number will be reached before the upper limit number of games is reached, There is a high possibility that a rapid increase in medals has occurred. Therefore, as described above, by lowering the reset rate of the AT mode, the medal increase speed can be moderated, and the soundness of the game can be ensured.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, in the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous interval, the information regarding the number of games from the winning of the BB to the winning of the BB is used as special information for the processing regarding the instruction function. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing bonus state processing in this modification.

In step S2801, it is determined whether it is in one of the BB states, and in step S2802 it is determined whether it is in the carryover state. If it is in the carryover state, it is determined in step S2803 whether or not the BB prize has been established in the current game. process. The processes of steps S2801 to S2806 are the same as the processes of steps S501 to S506. However, in this modification, if it is determined in step S2803 that the BB prize has not been established, then in step S2807 the RT game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is incremented by 1. This bonus state processing ends. The RT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games from the BB win to the BB win, and the game from the BB win to the end of the BB state that enables transition to the BB state as a special state. It is a kind of special information that is updated according to the progress of the game.

Also, in the bonus state processing, if any BB state is in progress at step S2801, 1 is added to the BB game counter at step S2808, and it is determined whether or not a minor win has been established at step S2809. . If a small winning combination is established, the number of payouts is added to the BB payout counter in step S2810, and it is determined in step S2811 whether or not the BB end condition is established. If the BB end condition is satisfied, a process of clearing the RT game counter to 0 as an initial value is executed in step S2812. Then, in steps S2813 to S2816, other processing for ending the bonus is executed, and then the bonus state processing ends. The processes of steps S2808 to S2811 and steps S2813 to S2816 are the same as the processes of steps S507 to S514.

That is, in this modified example, the number of games from the BB win to the BB win is grasped as the RT game counter. The RT game counter is initialized when the BB state ends, and the number of games required until the transition to the BB state can be grasped as the RT game counter even during the BB state.

In addition, in the carryover state in which the BB winning is carried over, it may be configured to be set to the RT state in which the probability of winning one of the replays is improved. In this case, the RT game counter can be said to be a counter that counts the number of games in the RT state as the carryover state. In this case, an upper limit may be set for the number of games in the RT state. is finished and the probability of winning a replay may return to the same probability as the normal game state.

Part of the lottery table for the normal game state in this modification is shown in FIG. 64(a). In this modification, when the first BB or the second BB is won, in addition to the double winning with the first replay with the index values IV=25 and 26, the first BB and the second BB are won with the index values IV=27 and 28. It is set so that a single win of 2BB also occurs. That is, in this modified example, it is possible to establish a first BB prize or a second BB prize in a game in which the first BB or the second BB is won.

The advantageous section transition processing in this modification is the same as the advantageous section transition processing (FIG. 51) of Modification 1 described above. However, in the transition AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example, in addition to the value of the BB payout counter, the winning probability of the transition AT mode transition lottery is set using the RT game counter. Specifically, when the BB payout counter is 7, AT with a probability of 5% when the RT game counter is 1 to 99, 30% when it is 100 to 999, 50% when it is 1000 to 1499, and 100% when it is 1500 or more. It is set to win the mode transition, and is set so that the higher the value of the RT game counter, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition. Further, when the BB payout counter is a value other than 7, if the RT game counter is any value other than 0, it is set so as not to win the AT mode transition.

In other words, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is set to be higher as the number of games required from the BB win to the occurrence of a situation in which the BB prize should be established increases. The situation in which the BB prize should be established is the situation at the end of the AT mode, and the case where a large number of games are required before such a situation occurs is when the AT mode continues for a long time, or when the AT mode is switched to. This is the case when it takes a lot of games to reach. Therefore, as described above, the greater the value of the RT game counter, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition, so that the longer the AT mode is continued, the easier it is to reset the AT mode. It is possible to relieve the addiction that requires a large number of games before shifting to the AT mode by using the reset rate of the AT mode.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to re-set the AT mode by winning the BB at the end of the AT mode, but even at the end of the AT mode, the lottery result of the game is difficult to come off. In some cases, the AT mode may end without establishing a BB prize. In this regard, as described above, the higher the RT game counter, the higher the AT mode reset rate. By doing so, it is possible to relieve the player from a different dimension than the ceiling counter that relieves the addiction of the slow transition to the AT mode. Therefore, it is possible to use the relief to push the continuation of the game.

The RT game counter is a counter that is not subject to initialization processing at the end of the advantageous interval, and even if the advantageous interval ends without any BB winning during the advantageous interval, the RT game counter is not reset. . Therefore, there is a possibility that the RT game counter will be larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. In this regard, in this modification, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is set (100% winning probability), assuming that the RT game counter is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval. In other words, relieving addiction in which a challenge to reset the AT mode cannot be performed is effective even in addiction over an advantageous section, and addiction exceeding the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section can also be remedied. Therefore, it is possible to follow the addiction over a longer period of time, and to suppress the decline in the player's desire to play.

In addition, in this modification, when the RT game counter is 0 and the BB prize is successfully established in the BB winning game, AT with a high probability (100% probability) regardless of the value of the BB payout counter. It is set to be a mode transition winning. The case where the BB win can be made in the BB winning game and the advantageous section transition processing is performed during the BB state is mainly when the AT mode is successfully reset using the BB state transition. This is the case when the BB state ends during the reset AT mode. That is, after the BB state ends in the reset AT mode, if the BB prize can be established in the game in which the BB is won again, the AT mode is reset. On the other hand, if the BB prize cannot be established in the game in which the BB prize is won, the BB prize is carried over and the AT mode proceeds as it is.

That is, it takes about 15 games to end the BB state in the AT mode as described above. The AT mode during the BB state of about 15 games will be repeated until the player fails to establish a BB prize in the game. Even if the BB winning game fails to establish the BB prize, the AT mode can be continued until the number of games in the AT mode at the time of resetting is exhausted. At the end of the mode, it is possible to establish a BB prize again and challenge to reset the AT mode. By doing so, it is possible to realize the AT mode consecutive game property straddling the advantageous section, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

In this case, since the winning mode of the first BB and the second BB is set so that the winning of the first BB and the second BB cannot be established at the same time, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated with the aim of winning the first BB. , the second BB winning cannot be established, and the first BB winning cannot be established when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated aiming at the second BB winning. With such a configuration, the difficulty of establishing a BB prize in a BB winning game is increased, and unless the BB win is correct and the operation is not mistaken, the BB status can be divided. It is possible to realize a game property such that the AT mode can be continued only for a certain period of time.

When playing the above game, it is preferable that it is difficult or impossible for the player to identify which BB has been won by the effect of the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, or the like. Concretely, it is preferable that the same effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64 and the like regardless of which BB is won. In addition, in order to realize a game in which the winning game of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is decided, it is preferable to perform a suggestive effect suggesting the game in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won. In the winning game, it is preferable that the notification for the winning game is performed with a predetermined probability. In this case, the notification for the winning game may be the same effect as the specific combination notification effect in FIG. 44(a), or may be different effect. When the BB winning game is configured to perform the same effect as the specific role notification effect, as described above, the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 that allows the type of the specific role to be determined is the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win. Since it cannot be established, a game is also played in which the player selects whether to operate in the operation mode for establishing the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize or in the operation mode for determining the type of the specific combination. becomes possible.

Here, in the advantageous interval transition processing in this modified example, the same processing as the advantageous interval transition processing in Modified Example 1 is performed. At the time of transition, an AT mode transition lottery is performed. That is, regardless of whether or not the transition to the advantageous section is in the BB state, if the RT game counter is 0, the transition to the AT mode can occur. Then, for example, after the setting value is changed by the winning probability setting process, etc., each BB winning flag and advantageous section flag are cleared, and the game is started from the normal section in the normal game state. In this case, if the transition to the advantageous section succeeds before the BB win, it is possible to cause the transition to the AT mode as well. Therefore, the first thing in the morning at the game hall becomes a chance, and it is possible to anticipate the effect of attracting customers first thing in the morning.

Although the advantageous section flag is cleared by the winning probability setting process, each BB winning flag may not be cleared. When clearing the advantageous section flag, it is selected whether or not to clear each BB winning flag. It may be possible. By adopting these configurations, it is possible to prevent the first thing in the morning from becoming too advantageous.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, as in modified example 3, the advantageous interval transition processing is performed at the end of the game in which the advantageous interval flag is set, and the game in which the BB prize is established during the AT mode is advantageous. Section ends. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

In this modified example, in steps S2901 to S2912, similar to steps S2301 to S2312, various information in the advantageous section is updated, and processing for ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of forced termination conditions is executed. If it is determined in step S2913 that the forced termination condition is not met, it is determined in step S2914 whether or not the AT mode termination flag is set. It is the same as the first embodiment in that the process for ending the interval is executed.

If the AT mode end flag is not set in step S2913, it is determined in step S2914 whether or not any AT mode flag is set. At S2915, it is determined whether or not any BB status flag is set. If it is in the AT mode and in the BB state, the process advances to step S2916 to determine whether the BB game counter is zero. When the BB status flag is set and the BB game counter is 0, it means that the game has achieved a BB prize. In this case, the process advances to step S2910 to execute processing for ending the advantageous section. If a negative determination is made in any one of steps S2914 to S2916, the section display second process is terminated.

That is, in this modification, when a BB prize is established during the AT mode, the advantageous section and the AT mode are terminated in the game in which the prize was established. Then, if a shift to the advantageous section occurs in the first game in the BB state, no notification of the pushing order occurs in the first game in the BB state. If the operation sequence of 1/1 is not correct, the 1st minor winning combination cannot be established, and the BB payout counter does not reach a specific number of 7. By doing so, it is possible to set the difficulty of resetting the AT mode to a high level, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the first game in the BB state.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, the BB game counter is used as special information in the advantageous section transition processing. As already explained, the BB game counter is a counter for grasping the number of games in the BB state. Also, in this modified example, the advantageous zone transition lottery table used for the advantageous zone transition lottery is different from that in the first embodiment. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an advantageous section transition lottery table in this modified example.

In this modified example, regardless of the lottery result that triggers the advantageous zone transition lottery, the transition lottery is set to be won with a probability of 30%. That is, even if the lottery result of the game in the normal section is a lottery result that triggers the advantageous section transition lottery, there is a case where the transition to the advantageous section is not performed. More specifically, for example, 30% of the time when the bell is won in the pressing order, the transition to the advantageous section occurs. Then, as in the first embodiment, when the advantageous section and the AT mode end in the first game in the BB state in the AT mode, even if the bell is won in the next game, the shift to the advantageous section is not possible. does not occur.

The advantageous section transition processing in this modification is the same as the advantageous section transition processing (FIG. 51) of Modification 1 described above. However, in the transition AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example, the winning probability of the transition AT mode transition lottery is set not according to the value of the BB payout counter but according to the BB game counter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67, in the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition in this modified example, if the BB game counter is 0 or 1, the AT mode transition won is not won. If the BB game counter is 4 or less, the higher the value of the BB game counter, the lower the probability of winning the AT mode transition. On the other hand, when the BB game counter is 5, it is set to 20%, 6 to 30%, 7 to 40%, 8 to 50%, 9 to 80%, and 10 or more to 100%. In the above cases, the setting is such that the greater the value of the counter, the higher the probability of winning the AT mode transition.

In other words, after the advantageous section ends in the first game in the BB state, the case where re-transition to the advantageous section can be caused as early as possible, and the case where re-transition to the advantageous section can be delayed as much as possible. However, the configuration is such that it is easy to win the AT mode transition. By doing so, when resetting the AT mode, it is possible to provide a strong feeling of excitement in the game from the end of the advantageous section to the re-transition.

Further, in the above modification, it is clarified that the BB game counter as special information used in the processing at the transition to the advantageous interval is also updated according to the progress of the game during the normal interval. By using such a parameter as special information and using it for processing related to the instruction function, it is possible to reflect the information of the game progressing regardless of whether it is an advantageous interval or not in the advantageous interval. Therefore, it can be very useful for diversification of games.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which a configuration in which special information such as a BB payout counter is used for processing at the time of transition to an advantageous interval is applied to a game in which the advantageous interval is terminated before shifting to the AT mode. In order to realize such playability, first, in the present embodiment, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are changed from those in the first embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

Steps S3001 to S3009 are the same as the processing in steps S1301 to S1309, and perform processing for updating various information in the advantageous section and processing for ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of forced termination conditions. If it is determined in step S3006 that the forced termination condition is not met, it is determined in step S3010 whether or not the AT mode termination flag is set. It is the same as the first embodiment in that the process for ending the interval is executed.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode end flag is not set in step S3010, it is determined in step S3011 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the process advances to step S3012 to determine whether the BB game counter is 1 or not. If it is the first game in the BB state in the CZ mode, it is determined in step S3013 whether or not the BB payout counter is 7 as a specific number. On condition that the specific flag is not set in 106d, the process advances to step S3007 to execute advantageous section end processing, and then the section display second processing ends. Also, if the BB payout counter is not 7 at step S3013, a process of setting a specific flag is executed at step S3015. Then, in step S3016, after executing the process of setting the specific command as an output target to the display control device 81, the second section display process ends. The specific command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the specific flag has been set.

It should be noted that the specific flag is cleared in the initialization process (step S3009) at the end of the advantageous section.

That is, in the present embodiment, the transition to the BB state is caused during the CZ mode, and when 7 medals are paid out in the first game in the BB state, the advantageous section ends and 7 medals are paid out. If no , the advantageous section does not end. Further, even when seven medals are paid out, if seven medals are not paid out before that, the advantageous section does not end.

The advantageous section transition processing in this embodiment is the same as the advantageous section transition processing (FIG. 51) of Modification 1 of the first embodiment. However, in the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition in the present embodiment, when the value of the BB payout counter is 7, the AT mode transition wins with a probability of 100%, and when the value is other than that, the AT mode transition. It is set so as not to be elected. As described above, if the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is not won, the number of ceiling games is set.

As already explained, the CZ mode is a mode in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is high, and is a mode that can be shifted mainly when the AT mode transition lottery is not won when a special role is won. In this embodiment, when a BB prize is established during the CZ mode, 7 medals are paid out in the first game in the BB state (for example, when the bell is won in the order of pushing, the first minor winning prize is established). On the condition that the advantageous section is once ended and the advantageous section is to be re-entered, it is possible to make the transition to the AT mode. By doing so, the playability during the CZ mode can be greatly improved.

However, in one advantageous section, there is only one chance to end the advantageous section by winning the BB prize, and once the BB prize is established during the CZ mode, 7 medals are paid out in the first game in the BB state. does not occur, a specific flag is set, and after that, even if it is possible to win a BB prize during the CZ mode and pay out 7 medals in the first game in the BB state, The advantage section does not end. By doing so, it is possible to further limit the chances of ending the advantageous section and causing the transition to the AT mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous. As a result, it is possible to greatly improve the degree of attention to the first game in the BB state shifted to the CZ mode.

Next, changes in the effect setting process at the time of all stop in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S1713 that the AT end command has not been received, it is determined in step S3101 whether or not the specific command has been received. If a specific command has been received, in step S3102, a process of setting a specific flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. The specified flag corresponds to the specified flag on the main controller 101 side, and is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the transition to the BB state has already occurred during the CZ mode in this advantageous section. be. The identified flag is cleared at the end of the advantageous section (not shown).

If it is determined in step S3101 that the specific command has not been received, it is determined in step S3103 whether or not any BB start command has been received. If any BB start command has been received, it is determined in step S3104 whether the CZ flag is set. If the CZ flag has been set and caused the transition to the BB state during the CZ mode, it is determined in step S3105 whether or not the identified flag has been set.

If the specified flag is not set and the BB state in the CZ mode to be started this time is the first time in the advantageous section this time, the end notice first effect (FIG. 47(a)) is performed in step S3106. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled as follows. If the BB prize in the CZ mode is not won in step S3104, or if the specified flag is set in step S3105, or after the process of step S3106 is executed, the process of setting the BB flag in step S3107 to run. After that, the process proceeds to step S1722. If no BB start command has been received in step S3103, the process advances to step S1720.

Next, the BB effect setting process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70(a).

In step S3201, it is determined whether or not the specified flag has been set. If the specified flag is set, the BB effect setting process is terminated. If the specified flag has not been set, the flow advances to step S3202 to determine whether the BB flag has been set. If the BB flag is not set, the flow advances to step S3203 to determine whether the CZ flag is set.

If the CZ flag is set and the CZ mode is on, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the BB carryover state is set. If it is in the BB carry-over state, it is determined in step S3205 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a losing result that can establish the BB prize. If it is not a result of losing, in step S3206, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a prize waiting effect is performed, and then this BB effect setting process is terminated. In addition, in the prize waiting effect in the present embodiment, for example, in FIG. 46(a), the character display portion may be changed to a display such as "Bonus prize until the end and a chance to get an AT!". Further, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode may be displayed as the number of remaining games display (FIG. 46(a)).

In step S3205, if the result of the lottery for the current game is a losing result, and if the BB prize can be established, in step S3207, a prize instructing effect (FIG. 46(b)) is performed. After controlling the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, this BB effect setting process is terminated.

If it is not in the CZ mode in step S3203 or if it is not in the carry-over state in step S3204, the BB effect setting processing is terminated without performing the winning waiting effect or winning instruction effect.

If the BB flag is set in step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3208. In step S3208, a process of adding 1 to the BB game number counter is executed. Then, in step S3209, it is determined whether or not the CZ flag is set.If the CZ flag is set, it is determined in step S3210 whether or not the BB game number counter is 1. If it is the first game in the BB state after transitioning to the CZ mode, it is determined in step S3211 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning of the pressing order bell. If the pressing order bell wins, in step S3212, the process of setting the end notice second effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 70(b), the end notice second effect in the present embodiment notifies that the player has won by pressing the bell by displaying characters such as "It's a chance!!" together with a predetermined character. , the order of operations corresponding to the first minor winning combination is not reported, and, for example, three characters of question marks are displayed side by side.

If it is determined in step S3211 that the bell is not won in the pressing order, the process advances to step S3213 to control the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the end notice third effect is performed, and then this BB effect setting process ends. .

Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

In the advantageous section shifted at t21, if the transition to the BB state occurs at the timing t22, which is neither the CZ mode nor the AT mode, the advantageous section does not end at the timing t23, which is the first game in the BB state. Therefore, at the timing of t24, which is the next game, the advantageous section transition processing is not executed, and the transition to the AT mode does not occur. The BB state shifted at the timing of t22 ends at the timing of t25 when the end condition of the BB state (payout of 71 or more coins) is satisfied.

When the transition to the CZ mode occurs at the timing of t26, the prize waiting effect and the prize instructing effect may occur as described above. Then, when the BB prize is established at the timing of t27, the end notice first effect is generated in the game, and the 1st minor role prize is successfully established in the next game (the 1st game in the BB state). In this case, notification is made that a transition to the AT mode will occur.

At the timing of t28, which is the first game in the BB state, if the first minor winning combination can be established, 7 medals are paid out, the BB payout counter becomes 7, and the advantageous section ends. Then, for example, when the transition to the advantageous interval occurs in the next game (t29), the advantageous interval transition processing is executed, and in the AT mode transition lottery processing at the time of transition, the BB payout counter is 7, so the AT mode transition wins. Then, the processing for starting the AT mode is performed. The BB state shifted at the timing of t27 is thereafter terminated at the timing of t30.

On the other hand, in the CZ mode shifted at the timing of t31, if the BB prize is established at the timing of t32, the first game in the BB state, which is the timing of t33, is the first game in the BB state. If a small winning combination cannot be established, for example, one medal is paid out and the BB payout counter becomes 1. In this case, the advantageous section does not end and a specific flag is set. Therefore, at the timing of t34, which is the next game, the advantageous section transition processing is not executed, and the transition to the AT mode does not occur.

The BB state shifted at the timing of t32 is thereafter terminated at the timing of t35 when the BB termination condition is satisfied. When the CZ mode is shifted again at the timing of t36 in this advantageous section, the BB prize is established at the timing of t37, and the first minor winning prize is established at the timing of t38 which is the first game in the BB state. Suppose In this case, 7 medals are paid out, and the BB payout counter becomes 7. However, since the specific flag is set as described above, the advantageous section does not end. Therefore, at the timing of t39, which is the game subsequent to the current game, the advantageous section transition processing is not executed, and the transition to the AT mode does not occur. Then, the BB state shifted at the timing of t37 is thereafter terminated at the timing of t40 when the BB termination condition is satisfied.

As described above, according to the present embodiment described in detail, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the configuration in which the BB payout counter is used as the special information to perform the advantageous interval transition processing, the BB payout counter is used to perform the advantageous interval end processing. In other words, when the BB payout counter in the first game of the BB state is 7 as a specific number, the advantageous interval is terminated, and the BB payout counter is used to perform processing at the time of transition to the advantageous interval. On the other hand, if the BB payout counter in the 1st game of the BB state is other than the specific number, the advantageous interval is not terminated, and as a result, the advantageous interval transition processing using the BB payout counter is not performed. In this way, by using one special information (BB payout counter) to perform the end processing of the advantageous interval and the transition processing of the next advantageous interval, one advantageous interval and the next advantageous interval can be made easier to associate with.

That is, in the first embodiment, the special information (BB game counter) used for the end processing of the advantageous interval and the special information (BB payout counter) used for the transition processing of the advantageous interval are different. As a result, when the special information for ending is updated until the advantageous section ends (BB game counter=1), the special information for transition processing is changed to the predetermined special information (BB payout counter=7). In some cases, it is updated to other special information (BB payout counter = 0, 1). created sex. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the special information used for the end processing of the advantageous section and the special information used for the transition processing of the advantageous section are made common. can be equalized, for example, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the occurrence of an event in which the AT mode is not entered despite the end of the advantageous section.

When a shift to the BB state occurs based on the player's operation, and the payout of 7 cards succeeds in the first game of the BB state based on the player's operation, the advantage section is terminated. In addition, even if the transition to the BB state is caused, if 7 cards are not paid out in the first game in the BB state, the advantageous section is not terminated. By doing so, the degree of difficulty of ending the advantageous section is increased, and it is possible to secure a balance with the advantage of the AT mode that is set when re-shifting to the advantageous section.

On top of that, when 7 cards are not paid out in the 1st game in BB state, a specific flag is set, and in the situation where the specific flag is set, 7 cards are paid out in the 1st game in BB state. Even if it occurs, the advantageous section will not end. In this way, by limiting the chances of ending the advantageous section, it is possible to make the player more interested in the first game in the BB state, encourage more careful operations, and improve the playability of the first game. becomes.

In this embodiment, by causing a transition to the BB state during the CZ mode, it is possible to end the advantageous section on the condition that the specific flag is not set. , the advantageous section cannot be terminated even if a transition to the BB state is caused. By doing so, the transition to the AT mode based on the transition to the BB state can be regarded as a secondary treatment of the normal AT mode transition lottery, and is executed based on the lottery results of each game. The BB state is used to shift to the AT mode within the range that does not destroy the conventional game characteristics such as winning the AT mode transition lottery that is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, or causing the transition to the CZ mode that is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. It is possible to add playability.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the processing configuration for limiting the chance of ending the advantageous section in the first game in the BB state to one during one advantageous section is made different. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing bonus state processing in this modified example.

The processing of steps S3301 to S3306 is the same as the processing of steps S501 to S506. If any BB state is determined in step S3301, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the specific flag is set. If the specific flag is not set and the current BB state is the first BB state in the current advantageous section, a process of adding 1 to the specific BB game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S3308. do. The specific BB game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the first BB state in one advantageous section. On the other hand, if the specific flag is set in step S3307, a process of adding 1 to the BB game counter is executed in step S3309.

After executing the process of step S3308 or step S3309, the process advances to step S3310. The processing of steps S3310 to S3316 is the same as the processing of steps S508 to S514. However, in step S3313, a process of clearing the current BB game counter to the initial value (0) is executed. That is, in the BB state ending this time, if the specific BB game counter is counting the number of BB games, the specific BB game counter is cleared to the initial value, and in the BB state ending this time, the BB game counter is set to the initial value. If the number of BB games has been counted, the BB game counter is cleared to the initial value.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

In this modification, if it is determined in step S3410 that the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S3411 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, then in step S3412 it is determined whether the specific BB game counter is equal to one. If the specific BB game counter is 1, it is determined whether or not the BB payout counter is 7 in step S3413. If the BB payout counter is 7, the process advances to step S3407 to execute processing for ending the advantageous section. Even if the specific BB game counter is 1, if the BB payout counter is not 7, a process of setting a specific flag is executed in step S3414, and a process of setting a specific command is executed in step S3415. This section display second process ends.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S3411, or if the specific BB game counter is not 1 in step S3412, the section display second processing is terminated. The processing of steps S3401 to S3409 is the same as the processing of steps S3001 to S3009.

In this way, in the configuration in which the BB game counter is used as a parameter during the BB state in the processing for ending the advantageous interval, the BB game counter to be used in the BB state is changed according to the number of times the BB state occurs during the advantageous interval. By using a different configuration, in performing processing for ending the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether the BB state of this time is the (first) BB state in the advantageous section of this time (specific flag determination of presence/absence of Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

In other words, by making the bonus state process performed during the BB state determine whether the first BB state is reached in the advantageous section, the first BB state is determined in the second section display process which is performed in each game. It is possible to achieve overwhelming simplification of the processing compared to the configuration that determines the state.

Specifically, when performing the process of ending the advantageous interval, it is configured to determine whether or not the specific BB game counter is 1, and the specific BB game counter is set only in the first BB state of the advantageous interval. Since it is used and not used in the subsequent BB state, the specific BB game counter becomes 1 only in the first BB state of the advantageous section, and the specific BB game counter does not become 1 in the subsequent BB state. By doing so, it is possible to make a configuration in which the process of ending the advantageous interval can be performed only in the first game in the BB state at the beginning of the advantageous interval.

In particular, in this modification, the BB payout counter for determining whether the end condition is satisfied in the BB state is the common BB regardless of whether or not it is the first BB state in the advantageous section. A payout counter is used, and the BB game counter for specifying the timing to end the advantageous interval is made different depending on whether it is the first BB state in the advantageous interval. By doing so, the processing configuration of the bonus state processing can be simplified, and, for example, the BB state will not end forever due to a processing error or the like, or the BB state will end immediately. can be

A specific BB game counter is then initialized at the end of the BB state. By doing so, the specific BB game counter becomes 1 only in the first BB state of the advantageous interval, and in the subsequent BB states, the specific BB game counter does not become 1 and remains at the initial value (0). can be done.

A specific flag for the CPU 102 to determine whether or not it is the first BB state of the advantageous interval is cleared in the advantageous interval information initialization process executed at the end of the advantageous interval. By doing so, it is possible to use the specific BB game counter again in the first BB state of the next advantageous section.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, in the first BB state in one advantageous section, a specific BB payout counter different from a normal BB payout counter is used to count the number of payouts during the BB state. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing in this modification.

In this modification, the processing for any BB state (step S3501: YES) is different from the bonus state processing in FIG. That is, if the game is in any of the BB states, a process of adding 1 to the BB game counter is executed in step S3507. Then, in step S3508, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been won. If a small winning combination has been established, the process proceeds to step S3509.

In step S3509, it is determined whether or not the specific flag is set, and whether or not the current BB state is the first BB state in the current advantageous section. If the specific flag is not set and it is in the initial BB state, in step S3510, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out this time to the specific BB payout counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. . The specific BB payout counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of medals paid out in the first BB state in one advantageous section. On the other hand, if the specific flag is set in step S3509, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out this time to the BB payout counter is executed in step S3511.

After executing the process of step S3510 or step S3511, the process proceeds to step S3512. In step S3512, it is determined whether or not the counter for which addition processing has been performed in step S3510 or S3511 has reached 71 or more, which corresponds to the termination condition of the BB state. If it is less than 71, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the score is 71 or more and the conditions for ending the BB state are satisfied, the processing of steps S3513 to S3516 is executed, and then the bonus state processing ends. The processing of steps S3513 to S3516 is the same as the processing of steps S511 to S514. However, in step S3515, a process of clearing the current BB payout counter to the initial value (0) is executed. That is, in the BB state ending this time, if the specific payout counter counts the number of medals paid out during the BB state, the specific BB payout counter is cleared to the initial value, and in the BB state ending this time, the BB When the payout counter counts the number of payout medals during the BB state, the BB payout counter is cleared to the initial value.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the second section display process in this modified example.

In this modification, if it is determined in step S3610 that the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S3611 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, it is determined whether or not the BB game counter is 1 in step S3612. If the BB game counter is 1, it is determined whether or not the specific BB payout counter is 7 in step S3613. If the specific BB payout counter is 7, the process advances to step S3607 to execute processing for ending the advantageous section. Even if the BB game counter is 1, if the specific BB payout counter is not 7, it is determined at step S3614 whether or not a specific flag has been set. is executed, and in step S3616, a process for setting a specific command is executed, and then the section display second process ends.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S3611 or if the specific flag is set in step S3614, the second section display process is terminated. The processing of steps S3601 to S3609 is the same as the processing of steps S3001 to S3009.

In this way, in the configuration in which the BB payout counter as a parameter during the BB state is used in the processing for ending the advantageous interval, the BB payout counter to be used in the BB state is changed according to the number of times the BB state occurs during the advantageous interval. By using a different configuration, in performing processing for ending the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether the BB state of this time is the (first) BB state in the advantageous section of this time (specific flag determination of presence/absence of Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

In other words, by making the bonus state process performed during the BB state determine whether the first BB state is reached in the advantageous section, the first BB state is determined in the second section display process which is performed in each game. It is possible to achieve overwhelming simplification of the processing compared to the configuration that determines the state.

Specifically, when performing the process of ending the advantageous section, it is configured to determine whether or not the specific BB payout counter is 7, and the specific BB payout counter is set only in the first BB state of the advantageous section. Since it is used and not used in the BB state after that, the specific BB payout counter becomes 7 only in the first BB state of the advantageous section, and the specific BB payout counter does not become 7 in the BB state after that. By doing so, it is possible to make a configuration in which the process of ending the advantageous interval can be performed only in the first game in the BB state at the beginning of the advantageous interval.

Then, the specific BB payout counter is initialized when the BB state ends. By doing so, the specific BB payout counter becomes 7 only in the first BB state of the advantageous section, and in the subsequent BB states, the specific BB payout counter does not become 7 and remains at the initial value (0). can be done.

By doing so, in determining whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the current BB state is the first BB state in the current advantageous section (specific flag presence/absence judgment). Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the winning probability of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is made lower than that of the second embodiment. On the other hand, in this modified example, the chance to end the advantageous section in the first game in the BB state is given any number of times during the advantageous section.

That is, as shown in FIG. 76(a), in this modified example, the probability of winning with the index value IV=25 is about 1/1000, and the probability of winning with the index value IV=26 is also about 1/1000. It is set as 1 in 1000, and the probability of winning any BB is about 1 in 500.

In the second interval display process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 76B, if it is determined in step S3710 that the AT mode end flag is not set, the BB game counter is 1 in step S3711. Determine whether or not When the BB game counter is 1, it is determined whether or not the BB payout counter is 7 in step S3712. If it is the first game in the BB state and the number of payouts in the BB state is 7, the process advances to step S3707 to execute processing for ending the advantageous interval. On the other hand, if the number of payouts in the BB state is not 7 in the first game in the BB state, the section display second processing is terminated as it is.

In the effect setting process at the time of all stop in this modification, as shown in FIG. 77, when it is determined that the AT end command is not received in step S1713, it is determined in step S3801 whether or not it is in the carryover state. . If it is in the carry-over state, in step S3802, the process of setting the winning waiting effect is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S1722. If it is not in the carryover state, it is determined in step S3803 whether any BB start command has been received. If one of the BB states is started, in step S3804 the process of setting the end notice first effect is executed, in step S3805 the process of setting the BB flag is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S1722. . If a negative determination is made in step S3803, the process also proceeds to step S1720.

In the BB effect setting process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 78, if it is determined in step S3901 that the BB flag is not set, it is determined in step S3902 whether or not it is in the carryover state, and in step S3903. determines whether or not it is possible to establish a BB prize in the current game. Even in the carry-over state, if the result is that the BB winning cannot be established, the BB effect setting processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the result is that the BB winning can be established, the process of setting the winning instruction effect is executed in step S3904, and then the BB effect setting process is terminated.

If the BB flag is set, the BB game number counter is incremented by 1 in step S3905, and it is determined whether or not the BB game number counter is 1 in step S3906. If it is the first game in the BB state, in step S3907, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the push order bell win. 2 After executing the process for setting the effect, the BB effect setting process is terminated. If the pressing order bell is not won, the process of setting the end notice third effect is executed in step S3909, and then the BB effect setting process is terminated.

That is, in this modification, regardless of whether or not it is the first BB state in the advantageous interval, if seven medals are paid out in the first game in the BB state, the advantageous interval ends. Further, in this modification, regardless of whether or not the player is in the BB state in the CZ mode, if seven medals have been paid out in the first game in the BB state, the advantageous section ends. By ending the advantageous section, as described above, it is possible to receive the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition, and it is possible to transition to the AT mode. By doing so, as a factor for causing the shift to the AT mode, the participation rate of winning any BB becomes high, and the real thrill of the slot machine that makes you look forward to winning the BB as a so-called bonus is realized. It is possible to realize game characteristics using processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section while avoiding erasure.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the condition for ending the BB state is changed. That is, in this modified example, the BB state is terminated assuming that the condition for ending the BB state is established based on the predetermined number of winnings of a predetermined small winning combination reaching the predetermined number of times. . FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing bonus state processing in this modification.

In the bonus state processing in this modified example, if it is determined in step S4001 that any BB state is not set, it is determined in step S4002 whether or not any BB winning flag is set. If any BB winning flag is set, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not any BB winning has been established. If any BB prize is established, the process proceeds to step S4004.

In step S4004, a process of inputting 8 as a predetermined number to the BB small combination counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB small combination counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of small combination wins in the bonus state (first BB state or second BB state). It is a kind of special information that is updated according to the progress of the game until the BB state ends.

After that, in step S4005, the BB winning flag is cleared, and in step S4006, the BB status flag is set. In step S4007, the BB start command is set, and then the bonus status process ends. do.

If it is in any BB state in step S4001, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the game result of the current game is any minor win. When none of the small wins is won, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. Incidentally, in step S4008, it is determined that none of the small wins has been won in the case of various replay wins, in the case of a loss result, or in the case of a loss. If any of the small wins is won, a process of subtracting 1 from the BB minor win counter is executed in step S4009.

In the subsequent step S4010, a process of adding the number of medals paid out this time to the BB payout counter is executed. After that, in step S4011, it is determined whether or not the BB small combination counter has become 0. When the BB small combination counter has not reached 0, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the BB small win counter has reached 0, the process of ending the bonus state is executed from step S4012 onwards.

That is, in step S4012, a process of clearing the BB payout counter to 0 is executed, and in step S4013, a process of clearing the BB status flag to be terminated this time is executed. Then, in step S4014, after executing the process of setting the corresponding BB end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this bonus state process ends.

In the second section display process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 80, if it is determined in step S4110 that the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S4111 whether the CZ mode flag is set. is determined, and if it is set, it is determined in step S4112 whether or not the BB minor win counter has reached 1 as a predetermined specific number. The specific number is set as the value of the BB minor winning combination counter at the time of winning a minor winning combination before the BB state ends (one time before). If the BB small combination counter is 1 and the number of small combination wins in the BB state has reached 7, then in step S4107 a process for ending the advantageous section is executed. If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S4111, or if the BB minor win counter is not the specific number (1) in step S4112, the second section display process is terminated.

That is, in this modified example, the advantageous section can be terminated each time the transition to the BB state is made during the CZ mode. Further, although detailed description with reference to drawings is omitted, in this modified example, the number of games in the CZ mode is not counted when a transition to the BB state is caused during the CZ mode. Specifically, even if the CZ mode flag is set in step S1017 in the winning result handling process (FIG. 33), if any BB state flag is set, the Without proceeding to the subtraction process of the CZ counter, the winning result corresponding process is ended. Although the number of games in the CZ mode is not counted even in the BB state, the CZ mode flag may not be cleared in the BB state even if the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is 0.

In the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the winning rate of the AT mode is determined for each pattern of the BB payout counter corresponding to the medal payout number value corresponding to eight push order bells. is set. Specifically, 56 pieces in the case of succeeding in establishing the first minor role winning 8 out of 8 pushing order bells, and 8 times not succeeding in establishing the first minor role winning. The 8 cards in the case are set so that the probability of winning the AT mode shift is the highest. In addition, the less the number of times the 1st minor winning combination is established, the lower the AT mode transition winning rate. 32 when both the number of establishments and the number of non-establishment of are 4 times, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be the lowest.

In the BB effect setting process in this modified example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82(a), it is determined in step S4201 whether or not the BB flag is set. If the BB flag is set, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is any minor win. If any minor winning combination is won, in step S4203, a process of adding 1 to the BB minor winning combination counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The BB minor winning combination counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of winning minor winning combinations in the BB state, and corresponds to the BB minor winning combination counter on the main control unit 101 side. In the subsequent step S4204, the process of updating the BB medium and small combination effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 in the BB state is performed, and then the BB effect setting process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), in the BB medium and small combination effect, history display is performed in a predetermined area of the auxiliary display section 65 to display the winning history of the small combination in the BB state. The history display is composed of eight individual history displays such as the first history display, the second history display, and the eighth history display corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings of minor winnings in the BB state. In FIG. 82(b), the 1st minor role winning was not successful in the 1st minor role winning, the 4th minor role winning to the 27th minor role winning were established, and the 2nd minor role winning It shows how the player has succeeded in establishing the first minor winning combination.

In step S4204, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the minor winning performance for informing that the lottery result of the current game is a winning of any of the minor winnings is performed in the BB medium and small winning performance. . In the minor winning effect, for example, as shown in FIG. , three characters showing question marks are displayed.

In the effect setting process at the time of all stop in this modification, as shown in FIG. 83(a), when it is determined that any BB end command is not received in step S1720, the BB flag is set in step S4301. Determine whether or not If the BB flag is not set, the process proceeds directly to step S1722. If the BB flag has been set, it is determined in step S4302 whether or not the CZ flag has been set, and if not, the process proceeds directly to step S1722. If the CZ flag is set, it is determined in step S4303 whether or not the current game is one of the minor win winning games. If the game is not a minor combination winning game, the process proceeds to step S1722.

If it is a minor winning game, it is determined in step S4304 whether or not seven medals have been paid out as the game result of the current game. When seven medals are paid out, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a success effect is performed in step S4305, and then the process proceeds to step S1722.

In the success effect, as shown in FIG. 83(b), a predetermined character is shown to be happy, and the current individual history display is updated to display corresponding to the fact that 7 medals have been paid out.

In step S4304, if seven medals have not been paid out as the result of the current game, it is checked in step S4306 whether or not one medal has been paid out as the result of the current game. judge. If one medal has been paid out, in step S4307, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a disappointment effect is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S1722.

In the disappointment effect, as shown in FIG. 83(c), the predetermined character is shown to be disappointed, and the current individual history display is updated to a display corresponding to the fact that 7 medals have not been paid out. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S4306 and none of the small winning prizes is established in the winning game, the process proceeds directly to step S1722. In this case, the current individual history display is updated to neither the display corresponding to the payout of 7 medals nor the display corresponding to the payout of 1 medal.

In this way, the game results of a plurality of games in the BB state are reflected in the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game by continuing the game over a period of time.

<Modification 5>
This modification is based on modification 4, and differs in the number of wins of a minor combination set as an end condition between the first BB and the second BB. Specifically, the 1st BB ends with 8 small wins won, and the 2nd BB ends with 2 small wins won. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing bonus state processing in this modification.

If it is determined in step S4401 that it is not in any BB state, it is determined in step S4402 whether or not the BB winning flag is set, and in step S4403 it is determined whether or not any BB winning has been established. do. If any BB prize has been established, it is determined in step S4404 whether or not the first BB prize has been established. If the 1st BB winning has been established, a process of inputting 8 to the BB minor winning combination counter is executed in step S4405. On the other hand, if the 1st BB winning has not been established in step S4404 but the 2nd BB winning has been established, the process of inputting 2 to the BB minor combination counter is executed in step S4406.

After executing the process of step S4405 or step S4406, the process of clearing the BB winning flag is executed in step S4407, the process of setting the BB status flag is executed in step S4408, and the BB start command is executed in step S4409. is executed, and then the bonus state processing is terminated.

If any BB state is determined in step S4401, the processing from step S4410 is executed. In steps S4410 to S4416, the same processing as in steps S4008 to S4014 is executed.

That is, in the present modification, in the 1BB state, the 1BB state ends with 8 small wins in the same manner as in the 4th modification, while in the 2BB state, 2 small wins different from the case of the 1BB state are completed. Winning a prize ends the second BB state.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set according to the BB payout counter, as in the fourth modified example. As for the 1 BB state, the number of successes in establishing the first minor winning combination and the number of failing to establish the first minor winning combination with the winning minor winning combination as the pressing order bell. , and the probability of winning the AT mode transition are the same as in the fourth modification.

However, in the 2 BB state in this modified example, the 2 BB state ends when the minor winning combination is won twice. In the 1BB state, the number of medals to be paid out is the same as the number of medals to be paid out when the first minor winning combination is successful once and not seven times. Also, in the 2BB state, the number of medals paid out (8) in the case where the first minor winning combination was successful once and was not successful once, the first minor winning combination was won in the 1BB state. The number of medals paid out is the same as the number of medals to be paid out in the case of not succeeding even once.

In the second BB state, if the first minor role winning is successful twice, the AT mode shift wins with a probability of 50%, and if the first minor role winning is successful once, the AT mode has a probability of 100%. It is set so that the probability of winning the AT mode transition is higher when the transition is won and when the first minor combination is won twice than when the player succeeds once. Note that the number of medals to be paid out is set so as not to win the AT mode transition when the first minor winning combination cannot be won even once in the 2BB state.

In this case, in the 2BB state, 50% of the case where the 1st minor role winning is successful in 2 out of 2 times, and the case where the 1st minor role winning is established only 1 out of 2 times At 100%, the AT mode transition is won, and the probability is about 71% that the AT mode transition is won because the probability is the probability of correcting once in the 6 different operation sequences. Then, it becomes higher than the total value (approximately 26%) of the probability of winning the AT mode transition according to each number of times of winning the first minor combination in the first BB state. That is, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is higher than in the first BB state than in the second BB state.

In this way, the pattern of the BB payout counter when the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the second BB state is included in the pattern of the BB payout counter when the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the first BB state. By adopting such a configuration, there is no need to prepare an AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition according to the type of BB state, and the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition can be shared in both BB states. Therefore, the storage capacity can be reduced, and the process of selecting a table according to the BB state can be omitted, which contributes to the simplification of the processing configuration.

Moreover, as described above, by utilizing the fact that the probability of a predetermined BB payout counter pattern (BB payout counter=7) differs depending on the BB state, the predetermined BB payout counter can be determined according to the type of BB state. Even if the winning probabilities of the lottery for AT mode transition at the time of transition are not set for each pattern, the probability of winning the lottery for AT mode transition at the time of transition can be substantially varied according to the type of BB state.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, special information is used to set the ceiling game number in the advantageous interval transition processing when the advantageous interval is terminated with the BB state as a trigger before the transition to the AT mode, as in the second embodiment. Configuration. In addition, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the player is in the BB state in the CZ mode, and regardless of whether or not the BB payout counter is 7, the advantageous section is terminated in the first game in the BB state. Configuration. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing processing when transitioning to an advantageous section in this embodiment.

In step S4501, as the special information, a process of grasping the BB payout counter is executed. In subsequent step S4502, lottery processing for the number of ceiling games is executed. As shown in FIG. 87, the number-of-top-games table in this embodiment is set so that the number of ceiling games to be selected varies depending on the set value and whether or not the BB payout counter is 7 as a specific number. there is

Specifically, when the BB payout counter is a specific number, the probability of a short ceiling game number is higher than when there is no specific number, and the ceiling game number is set as one game. The probability of winning is set to 20% when the BB payout counter is a specific number, and 1% when the BB payout counter is not a specific number. Further, the probability that the number of ceiling games is set to 2 to 100 games is higher when the BB payout counter is a specific number than when it is not a specific number, and the number of ceiling games is set to 701 to 1000 games. The probability of winning is set to be higher when the BB payout counter is not the specific number than when it is the specific number. In addition, in relation to the set value, the higher the set value, the easier it is to set the number of ceiling games to be short.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the player is shifted to the BB state before shifting to the AT mode, and succeeds in achieving the first minor winning combination in the first game in the BB state (when seven medals are paid out). , the ceiling game number is set to be 1 game with a probability of about 20%. As a result, it becomes possible to cause a transition to the AT mode without receiving an AT mode transition lottery in the next game. As a result, effects similar to those of the second embodiment can be expected.

After the ceiling game number lottery process is executed in step S4502, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the ceiling game number to the ceiling counter is executed in step S4503. Then, in step S4504, processing for setting the ceiling command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed.

In the following step S4505, it is determined whether or not any of the BB state flags is set, and whether or not it is an advantageous section that has shifted to the BB state. That is, when the advantageous section ends in the first game in the BB state, and then a transition to the advantageous section occurs during the BB state, a process of setting a specific flag is executed in step S4506. Then, in step S4507, a process of inputting 100 to a specific counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The specific counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games played since the specific flag was set. Then, the specific flag is cleared. As described above, when the specific flag is set, the end of the advantageous section using the BB state is restricted. That is, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous interval is reset using the BB state, the end of the advantageous interval using the BB state is restricted for 100 games thereafter.

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing lottery result correspondence processing in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, if the bell is won in the order of pressing in step S4609, it is determined in step S4610 whether or not any AT mode flag is set. If any of the AT mode flags is set, in step S4611, processing for performing notification of the pressing order corresponding to the first minor combination is executed, and in step S4612, the pressing order notification command is set. , the lottery result handling process is terminated. These processes are the same as those in the first and second embodiments.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if none of the AT mode flags are set in step S4610, it is determined in step S4613 whether or not the vehicle is in any BB state. If it is in any BB state, it is determined in step S4614 whether or not the BB game counter is 0 and it is the first game in the BB state. If it is the first game in the BB state, a notification lottery table is acquired in step S4615, and notification lottery processing is executed in step S4616.

As shown in FIG. 89, the notification lottery table in the present embodiment is set such that the larger the value of the number AG of games in the advantageous interval, the more likely it is that the first game in the BB state will be notified of the pressing order. Specifically, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is up to 100, there is a 5% probability that the pushing order notification will occur. Notification of the pressing order occurs. In other words, if the transition to the AT mode does not readily occur after transitioning to the advantageous section, and if the addiction is large, the pressing order notification for the first game in the BB state is likely to occur.

In the second section display process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, if it is determined in step S4710 that the AT mode end flag is not set, it is determined in step S4711 whether or not the specific flag is set. judge. If the specific flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the BB game counter is 1 in step S4712. If the BB game counter is 1 and it is the first game in the BB state, the process advances to step S4707 to execute processing for ending the advantageous interval.

If the specific flag is set in step S4711, a process of subtracting 1 from the specific counter is executed in step S4713. Then, in step S4714, it is determined whether or not the specific counter has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the section display second processing is terminated. When the specific counter becomes 0, the process of clearing the specific flag is executed in step S4715. After that, in step S4716, after executing the process of setting the clear command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the second section display process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the clear command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the specific flag has been cleared and the number of ceiling games can be reset.

As described above, instead of executing the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition based on the special information in the advantageous section transition process, or changing the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition based on the special information, Even if the number of ceiling games set in the process is changed based on the special information, it is possible to set the advantageous section using the special information updated according to the progress of the game from the BB win to the end of the BB state. becomes.

In this case, it is easier to set a short ceiling number of games when the advantageous interval transition processing is performed during the BB state than when the advantageous interval transition processing is performed during the normal game state. , it is possible to improve the superiority of the BB state without changing the parameters of the BB state itself, such as the maximum number of payouts in the BB state and the probability of winning a small winning combination. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to winning the BB, which enables the transition to the BB state.

Regardless of the game result of the first game in the BB state, the advantageous section can be ended, and when a shift to the advantageous section occurs during the BB state, a specific flag is set. Therefore, the end of the advantageous section is restricted in the first game in the BB state thereafter. By doing so, even if the advantageous interval is ended regardless of the game result of the first game in the BB state, it is possible to set a limit on the chance of ending the advantageous interval.

The specific flag is cleared by completing 100 games in the advantageous section, and every 100 games, a chance to reset the number of ceiling games is given by using the BB winning prize. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the specific flag will be cleared by continuing the game, and to stimulate the desire to play the game.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, it is determined by lottery whether resetting of the advantageous section using the BB state is restricted for a predetermined number of games. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing processing when transitioning to an advantageous section in this modified example.

In this modification, similarly to steps S4501 to S4504, after executing the processing for setting the number of ceiling games in steps S4801 to S4804, in step S4805, it is determined whether or not any BB state exists. do. If it is in any of the BB states, a process of acquiring a specific flag set lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed in step S4806, and a specific flag set lottery process is executed in step S4807.

In the specific flag set lottery table, as shown in FIG. 92, the probability of setting the specific flag differs depending on the number of ceiling games set this time. Specifically, the setting is such that the smaller the number of ceiling games, the higher the probability that the specific flag will be set, and the higher the number of ceiling games, the lower the probability that the specific flag will be set.

After the specific flag set lottery process is executed in step S4807, it is determined whether or not the specific flag set lottery process is won in step S4808. finish. If the winner is selected, a specific flag is set in step S4809, and 100 is input to the specific counter in step S4810, after which the advantageous section transition process ends.

In this way, the setting rate of the specific flag is changed according to the set number of ceiling games, and the higher the number of ceiling games, the more difficult it is for the specific flag to be set. So, while trying not to kill the gameplay such as establishing a BB prize and setting a short ceiling game number, the BB prize is established by mistake despite the fact that the number of ceiling games is only a little left. As a result, it is possible to suitably avoid the event that the number of ceiling games is reset.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the notification lottery table used in the pushing order notification lottery (step S4616) of the first game in the BB state is different from that of the third embodiment.

In the notification lottery table in this modification, as shown in FIG. 93, the notification of the pressing order of the first game in the BB state when the transition to the BB state occurs during the normal mode is performed in units of 100 games. A state in which the pressing order notification is likely to occur and a state in which the pressing order notification is unlikely to occur are set alternately. Specifically, when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is 1 to 100, the push order notification occurs with a low probability of 10%, while when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is 101 to 200 The pressing order notification occurs with a high probability of 30%. Then, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 201 to 300, the probability is low 10%, if it is 301 to 400, the probability is 30%, and if it is 401 to 500, the probability is 10%, and so on. , a state in which the pressing order notification occurs with a low probability and a state in which the pressing order notification occurs with a high probability are repeated.

Then, in order to generate the pushing order notification in the first game in the BB state and reset the number of advantageous ceiling games, it is necessary to shift to the BB state in a state where the pushing order notification is generated with a high probability. It is preferable to let it occur.

As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the CZ mode is in progress, the advantageous section ends at the first game in the BB state, but the CZ mode, which is likely to win the AT mode transition lottery, is avoided in the first place. In order to efficiently obtain the chance of shifting to the AT mode, it is preferable to cause the shift to the BB state in a situation where the push order notification is likely to occur.

In this regard, in this modified example, the transition rate to the CZ mode is configured to fluctuate in relation to the number of games AG in the advantageous section, and the transition to the CZ mode occurs in a state in which the above-described push order notification is likely to occur. Therefore, in a state where it is difficult for the press sequence notification to occur, the transition to the CZ mode is likely to occur. More specifically, in a situation where the advantageous interval game number AG is 1 to 100 and the pressing order notification occurs with a low probability, it is easy to shift to the CZ mode, and the advantageous interval game number AG is 101 to 200. In situations where the push order notification occurs with a high probability, it is difficult to shift to CZ mode, and when the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 201 to 300, the push order notification occurs with a low probability, and it is easy to shift to CZ mode. In this manner, the state in which the transition to the CZ mode is likely to occur and the state in which the press sequence notification is likely to occur alternately.

In other words, in situations where the transition to CZ mode is likely to occur, expect AT mode transition winning in CZ mode, and in situations where it is difficult to transition to CZ mode, reset the number of advantageous ceiling games using the BB state It is possible to make the user anticipate, and by alternately arriving as if they are overlapping, it is possible to maintain the anticipation for the AT mode transition in any situation.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the above specific flag is not set, and the advantageous section can be re-set using the BB state at any timing. However, in this modified example, the condition for ending the BB state is changed so that a larger number of games are required until the BB state is ended. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing bonus state processing in this modified example.

In this modification, if it is determined in step S4901 that the game is in one of the BB states, a process of adding 1 to the BB game counter is executed in step S4907. Then, in step S4908, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination has been established, and if established, addition processing of the BB payout counter is executed in step S4909.

In subsequent step S4910, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag is set. If the first BB state flag is set and the game is in the first BB state, it is determined in step S4911 whether or not the BB payout counter is 71 or more. If the number is 71 or more, and 71 or more medals are paid out in the first BB state, the processing for ending the BB state after step S4913 is executed, and then the bonus state processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the first BB state flag is not set in step S4910 and the game is in the second BB state, it is determined in step S4912 whether or not the BB payout counter is 250 or more. If the number is 250 or more, and 250 or more medals are paid out in the second BB state, the BB state end processing is executed after step S4913, and then the bonus state processing is ended. If the payout number of medals in the first BB state is less than 71 in step S4911, or if the number of payout medals in the second BB state is less than 250 in step S4912, the bonus state processing ends.

The processing of steps S4901 to S4906 and the processing of steps S4913 to S4916 are the same as the processing of steps S501 to S506 and steps S511 to S514.

Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, in the advantageous section transition processing in this modified example, after executing the processing of steps S4501 to S4504 in FIG. Terminates the advantageous section transition process.

In the second section display process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 95, if it is determined in step S5010 that the AT mode end flag is not set, in step S5011 it is determined whether the BB game counter is 1. judge. If the BB game counter is 1, the process advances to step S5007 to execute processing for ending the advantageous interval. If the BB game counter is not 1 in step S5011, the second interval display process is terminated.

That is, in this modification, the specific flag is not set when transitioning to the advantageous section in the BB state, and regardless of the number of games since the ceiling game number was set last time, it is possible to establish the BB prize. Then, it becomes possible to finish the advantageous section in the first game in the BB state in which the prize was awarded, and challenge to reset the number of ceiling games.

However, in this modification, as described above, the maximum number of medals to be paid out is different between the first BB state and the second BB state as an end condition. , the number of games required to end the BB state is different. Specifically, the first BB state ends when 71 or more medals are paid out, and 7 1/6ths of the 1/6th of the bells to be won in about 1/1.5 per game. Since it becomes a payout and one coin is paid out once every two times in the operation order of 5/6, if the first BB state is mainly digested during the non-AT mode in which the push order notification does not occur, It takes about 55 games to end the first BB state. On the other hand, the second BB state ends when 250 or more medals are paid out, which is more than the first BB state. It takes about 192 games, which is more than the case of the first BB state, to finish the state.

In other words, when the ceiling game number is reset by winning the first BB and shifting to the first BB state, the first BB state is ended and the next ceiling game number is reset. However, if the number of ceiling games is reset by winning the second BB and shifting to the second BB state, the second BB state is terminated and the next number of ceiling games is performed. Approximately 192 games are required until the number of ceiling games is reset, and in the case of winning the 1st BB, the number of games until the number of ceiling games can be reset next time is smaller, which is advantageous for the player. becomes.

The second BB is easier to win than the first BB and the second BB. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the 1st BB from becoming too advantageous, increase the rarity of winning the 1st BB, and draw attention to winning the 1st BB during the normal game state.

By doing so, it is possible to adjust the frequency with which the number of ceiling games is reset simply by changing the conditions for ending the BB state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the games with such game characteristics with a relatively simple configuration.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) A configuration in which special information updated in accordance with the progress of the game from the BB win to the end of the BB state, which enables the transition to the BB state as a special state, is used in the processing relating to the instruction function. , BB payout counter, BB game counter, RT game counter, BB small combination counter, etc. have been described as examples of the special information, but the special information is not limited to these, and may be other information. For example, the special information may be a counter for grasping the number of times a small winning combination is won during the BB state, or a counter for grasping the number of increased medals or decreased number of medals during the BB state. In addition, a counter for grasping the number of games from the BB win to the end of the BB state may be used as the special information, or the number of increased medals and the number of decreased medals from the BB win to the end of the BB state may be grasped. A counter for this may be used as the special information.

(2) In a configuration in which special information updated according to the progress of the game from the BB win to the end of the BB state, which enables transition to the BB state as a special state, is used in the processing relating to the instruction function. As examples of the processing related to the instruction function, the advantageous section transition processing and the processing for the end of the advantageous section have been described, but the processing related to the instruction function performed using the special information is not limited to these, and may be other processing. . For example, the special information may be used for the AT mode addition lottery, or the special information may be used for the CZ mode transition lottery. Further, the timing of executing the processing related to the instruction function using the special information is not limited to the transition to the advantageous section or the end of the advantageous section, and may be a predetermined timing during the advantageous section.

For example, if it is configured to perform an additional lottery or a CZ mode transition lottery using special information, when a specific role is won during the BB state, an additional lottery or CZ using the BB payout counter etc. until then By making the winning probability of the mode transition lottery different (for example, if the BB payout counter is a specific number, it is easy to win, and if it is not a specific number, it is difficult to win), the game progress in the advantageous section and the BB state are improved. It is possible to associate well with the game progress in.

(3) In a configuration in which special information updated according to the progress of the game from the BB win to the end of the BB state, which enables transition to the BB state as a special state, is used in the processing relating to the instruction function. , the special state is not limited to the BB state, and may be, for example, the RT state, the REG state, the CB state, the MB state, or the like. That is, for example, if the RT state is a special state, after winning a transition result (transition replay) that enables a transition to a predetermined RT state in which the probability of winning a replay increases, A configuration in which special information updated according to the progress of the game until the transition result win is established and the state is shifted to a predetermined RT state until a termination condition is satisfied in the predetermined RT state is used for processing related to the instruction function. do it. In this case, the special information may be, for example, a game number counter (RT game counter) for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games continued in the RT state, or the CPU 102 grasps the number of medals paid out during the RT state. Alternatively, it may be an increase/decrease counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the increase/decrease number of medals during the RT state.

(4) In the BB state as a special state, only the probability of winning a common bell is higher than in the normal game state or the carry-over state, and there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage between these states, but the probability of winning a common bell is also high. The probability may be the same as that of the normal game state or carry-over state, and there may be no difference in the degree of advantage between these states. In addition, by reducing the winning probability of small wins such as common bells and replays in the BB state, and reducing the number of medals paid out when winning a small win in the BB state, the normal game state and the carryover state are better. The configuration may be more advantageous than the BB state. By adopting a structure in which the normal game state and the carry-over state are more advantageous than the BB state, the advantage of shifting to the BB state is reduced, and the timing of shifting to the BB state and resetting the advantageous section is determined more strictly. is also possible.

Furthermore, by increasing the probability of winning a small winning combination such as a common bell in the BB state or replaying, or by increasing the number of medals to be paid out when winning a small winning combination in the BB state, the BB state, the normal game state, or the carry-over state is changed. , may be made larger than those of each of the above-described embodiments.

In order to increase the difference in the degree of advantage between the BB state and the normal game state or carry-over state as compared with the above-described embodiments, the probability of winning small wins and replays during the BB state is increased as described above. Alternatively, in addition to the configuration of increasing the number of medals to be paid out when winning a small winning combination, the configuration of priority setting processing (step S313) when winning the bell in the pressing order may be changed. That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, in the priority setting process when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the number priority control is performed in any state. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the order corresponding to the operation order including one minor combination, the first minor combination winning can be established. By changing this, while the number priority control is performed in the BB state, the symbol number priority control may be performed in the normal game state and the carryover state. As a result, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order corresponding to the operation order including the first minor combination when the bell is won in the normal game state or the carryover state, the first minor combination is not won, but the fourth. Small role winning to 27th small role winning will be established or will be missed. In other words, in the normal game state and the carryover state, when the bell is won in the pressing order, the winning of the first minor combination is not established, and the difference in the degree of advantage between the BB state and the normal game state or the carryover state is that of each of the above embodiments. be larger than

(5) By ending the advantageous section in the game before the end of the BB state, the advantageous section transition processing is performed during the BB state, but the advantageous section is performed before the transition to the BB state. may be terminated. For example, the advantageous section may end in the game in which the BB is won. By doing so, the BB is won and the advantageous section ends, and then the transition to the BB state occurs before the transition to the advantageous section occurs, so that the advantageous section transition processing is executed during the BB state. It is possible to realize a playability that can be played. Further, for example, a predetermined end result (for example, a predetermined replay) may be provided, and the advantageous section may be terminated based on the predetermined end result winning or the predetermined end result winning. In this case, in the carry-over state, the advantageous section is ended based on a predetermined end result winning or a predetermined end result winning, and then, before shifting to the advantageous section again, the BB state can be obtained. It is possible to realize a game property that allows execution of processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section.

(6) As in the first embodiment, when the transition to the BB state is caused during the AT mode, the advantageous section ends in the first game in the BB state, but the number of remaining AT mode games It may be configured such that whether or not to end the advantageous section in the first game in the BB state differs depending on the state. That is, for example, if the number of AT mode remaining games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 30), the advantageous section ends in the first game in the BB state, while the remaining AT mode number of games is greater than the predetermined number. In this case, the advantageous section may not end in the first game in the BB state. Also, in the first game in the BB state, an end lottery is performed to determine whether or not to end the advantageous section, and the winning probability of the end lottery is different according to the number of remaining AT mode games, and the number of remaining AT mode games is set to be different. If the number is equal to or less than a predetermined number, it is easy to win the final lottery, and if the number is greater than the predetermined number, it is difficult to win the final lottery. By doing so, it is possible to suitably avoid the event of ending the AT mode by establishing a BB prize in a situation where there are still many remaining games in the AT mode.

(7) In the first embodiment, when a transition to the BB state occurs during the AT mode, the advantageous section ends in the first game in the BB state. , the special information may be used to determine whether or not to end the advantageous section. That is, as in the second embodiment, if the BB payout counter is a specific number (7) in the first game in the BB state, the advantageous section is terminated. If not, the advantageous section may not end. By doing so, for example, when the BB prize is established unintentionally, by performing an operation that does not comply with the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell, the first minor winning combination is established. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the end of the advantageous section by setting the BB payout counter to a number other than the specific number.

(8) The type of BB state is not limited to the first BB state or the second BB state, and other BB states may be set, or only one type of BB state may be set. .

(9) Depending on the type of BB state, whether or not the advantageous section ends during the BB state may differ. For example, the advantageous interval may end in the first game in the first BB state, while the advantageous interval may not end in the first game in the second BB state, or vice versa. In addition, in a configuration in which an end lottery is performed to determine whether or not to end the advantageous interval, and the advantageous interval is ended when the end lottery is won, it is easy to win the end lottery in the first game in the 1BB state, but the In the first game in the 2BB state, it may be difficult to win the ending lottery, or vice versa.

(10) Depending on the type of BB state, the transition to the advantageous section may or may not occur during the BB state. For example, in the first BB state, the advantageous section transition lottery is won or is likely to be won, while in the second BB state, the advantageous section transition lottery is not won or is less likely to be won than in the first BB state, or vice versa. good. In addition, although it is possible to win the advantageous section transition lottery in any BB state, in the first BB state, the advantageous section flag is set in the game in which the lottery is won, while in the second BB state, the lottery is not performed. The advantageous interval flag may not be set in the winning game, and the advantageous interval flag may be set after the second BB state ends or when the second BB state ends.

In this case, in relation to (9) above, while the advantageous section ends or is likely to end, the BB state is difficult or does not transition to the advantageous section, or the advantageous section does not or is difficult to end, while the advantageous section A BB state that easily transitions to or transitions to an interval may be provided.

(11) Regarding the special information used in the advantageous interval transition process, for example, the number of medals paid out in the first game in BB state (BB payout counter), the number of games in BB state (BB game counter), and the number of games from winning BB to winning The number of games (RT game counter) and the number of medals paid out (BB payout counter) based on eight small winnings during the BB state are used to reflect the game results of one game or a plurality of games. As described above, the special information used for the processing for ending the advantageous interval may be configured to reflect the game results of one game or a plurality of games. That is, as a game result of one game, in the first game in the BB state, if the BB payout counter as special information is 7 as a specific number, the advantageous section is ended, and if the BB payout counter is not a specific number. However, for example, if the number of medals paid out (BB payout counter) based on a predetermined number of times (for example, 7 times) minor wins during the BB state is a specific number, the advantageous section is ended. On the other hand, if the value is different from the specific number, the advantageous section may not be ended or may be more difficult to end than the specific number.

(12) When the lottery result of the game is a wrong result, it is possible to establish a BB prize. A configuration in which priority is given, or a configuration in which both of them are used, may be configured such that a BB prize can be established even in cases other than the result of losing. By doing so, it is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that the AT mode ends as it is because the BB prize cannot be established just before the end of the AT mode.

(13) For example, in a configuration where a 2-bet game can be played in addition to a 3-bet game, the probability that the lottery result will be lost in the 2-bet game is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be lost in the 3-bet game. It is good also as a structure with a higher probability of becoming. By doing so, by switching to the 2-bet game, it is possible to establish the BB prize more easily than in the 3-bet game. It is possible to preferably avoid the event that the mode ends.

(14) When a transition to the BB state occurs during the AT mode, the advantageous interval ends in the first game of the BB state, but the advantageous interval ends according to the number of remaining AT mode games. A configuration in which the game during the BB state is different may be adopted. For example, if the number of AT mode remaining games is large (e.g., 30 games or more), the advantageous section ends at the end of the BB state (e.g., the 7th game), and the number of remaining AT mode games is small (e.g., less than 30 games). ), the advantageous section ends at the beginning of the BB state (for example, the first game). In order to minimize the number of remaining AT mode games when the advantageous interval ends, the game in which the advantageous interval ends during the BB state is made different. By doing so, it is possible to preferably avoid the event that the advantageous section ends in a situation where there are still many remaining games in the AT mode.

In this case, it is preferable to change the lottery table for shifting to the AT mode in the process for shifting to the advantageous section according to the number of games in the BB state when the advantageous section has ended. Specifically, when the advantageous section ends in the first game in the BB state, the pattern of the medal payout number for one game is set in the AT mode transition lottery table at the time of transition (if the BB payout counter is 7, While AT mode transition wins, if it is other than 7, AT mode transition won't win, etc.), when the advantageous section ends in the second game in BB state, the pattern of medal payout for 2 games will be changed to AT mode at the time of transition. (If the BB payout counter is 14, the AT mode transition is won, but if the BB payout counter is other than 14, the AT mode transition is not won, etc.).

(15) Irrespective of the number of post-addition games (post-addition counter) in the AT mode, the number of remaining games for display in which a prize-winning notification or a prize-winning instruction notification is performed is greater than the number of remaining display games for which post-addition notification is generated. The number of games may be set as large as possible. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to cause the transition to the BB state after carefully ascertaining whether or not the number of post-loading games exists, thereby allowing the game to be played during the AT mode. It is possible to improve the performance.

(16) In the first game in the BB state in the AT mode, if the BB payout counter is a specific number (7), the advantageous interval is terminated, but if it is other than the specified number, the advantageous interval is not terminated. When there is the number of games to be added later, it may be configured such that the notification of the order of pushing is less likely to occur or does not occur in the first game in the BB state than when there is no number of games to be added later.

(17) Instead of executing the advantageous interval transition processing in the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery is won (at the start of the game), the advantageous interval transition processing is performed at the end of the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery is won. and the configuration for executing the advantageous interval transition process at the start of the next game of the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery was won, but the timing of executing the advantageous interval transition lottery is not limited to the above. , at least after winning the advantageous section transition lottery. For example, it may be when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated for the first time in the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, or after the medal payout in the game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery is won is completed. It may be at the time of the betting operation for the game next to the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery was won, or at the end of the game next to the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery was won. Further, the advantageous interval transition process may be executed in a game after a plurality of games from the game in which the advantageous interval transition lottery was won.

(18) Based on the game start operation, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed (in the lottery result handling process). Although an example in which the advantageous section flag is set in the first process and the second section display process has been described, the configuration may be such that the advantageous section flag is set when the advantageous section transition lottery is won.

(19) Although a configuration has been described in which the advantageous section transition lottery is executed based on the game start operation, it may be configured to be executed based on the game end operation (for example, in the winning result handling process). In this case, after winning the advantageous section transition lottery performed based on the end operation, the advantageous section flag may be set before the start operation of the next game becomes possible.

(20) The special information updated according to the progress of the game from the BB winning to the end of the BB state, which enables transition to the BB state as a special state, is the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. Although the information is not initialized in the information initialization process, it may be initialized. Even with such a configuration, for example, after the end of the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval transition processing can be executed based on the special information updated according to the progress of the game in the BB state and the normal interval. is possible.

(21) When reaching the ceiling game where the ceiling counter reaches 0, the AT mode win flag is set without performing the AT mode transition lottery, but even if the ceiling game is reached, A configuration may be adopted in which an AT mode transition lottery is executed. In this case, in the game reaching the ceiling game, the AT mode winning flag may be set both when the AT mode transition lottery is won and when the AT mode transition lottery is not won. In addition, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the game that has reached the ceiling game, a more advantageous benefit is given than if the AT mode transition lottery is not won and the AT mode winning flag is set ( For example, the second AT mode may be easily set).

(23) A first excess flag is set as information indicating that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval has been reached, and a second excess flag is set as information indicating that the upper limit increase number of the advantageous interval has been reached. I explained the configuration in which the occurrence rate of the push order notification in the 1st game of the BB state in the AT mode is changed depending on the presence or absence of the flag and the second excess flag, but the situation where the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set According to the number of additional games that occurred in , and / or according to the number of additional games that occurred in the situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag was set, the order of pressing the 1st game in the BB state during AT mode It is good also as a structure which makes the occurrence rate of alerting|reporting different. That is, the greater the number of additional games that occur in the situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, and/or the more the number of additional games that occur in the situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set A configuration may be adopted in which the greater the number of times, the more likely it is that the pressing order notification will occur in the first game in the BB state.

(24) The specific flag allows the CPU 102 to grasp whether or not it is the first BB state in the advantageous section. It is good also as a structure which grasps|ascertains. In this case, by providing a specific counter in the various counter areas 106e and adding 1 to the specific counter each time the transition to the advantageous section and the transition to the BB state is made, the number of times of BB after transitioning to the advantageous section The configuration may be such that the CPU 102 can grasp whether it is in the state.

In this case, for example, as in the second embodiment, after the CPU 102 grasps that it is the first BB state in the advantageous section by a specific flag, a specific BB game counter, or a specific payout counter, 1 of the BB state The CPU 102 recognizes that the first BB state during the advantageous interval is the first BB state in the advantageous interval when seven medals are paid out in the first game, so that the CPU 102 grasps the structure. , the advantageous section may be terminated when seven medals are paid out in the first game in the BB state.

In addition, the ease of ending the advantageous section may differ depending on how many times the BB state has occurred after transitioning to the advantageous section. Specifically, for example, if it is applied to the second embodiment, in the first BB state after shifting to the advantageous section, if 7 medals are paid out in the first game in the BB state. In the BB state of the second time after the advantageous interval ends or is likely to end, even if 7 medals are paid out in the first game of the BB state, even if the first game It is also possible to configure such that the advantageous section is less likely to end than the case or is not ended.

(25) Although it was explained on the premise that if a prize could not be established in the game in which the 1st BB or 2nd BB was won, the state would be shifted to the carryover state, The first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be cleared if no winning can be established in the BB winning game.

(26) Although the initial number of AT mode games is set to 50, it may be more or less. However, when the AT mode is reset during the BB state, by making the AT mode continue longer than the game until the BB state ends, during the reset AT mode, It is possible to provide a configuration in which a chance to cause a transition to the BB state and reset the AT mode is given. It should be noted that if the AT mode is reset during the BB state by making the conditions for ending the BB state different or the number of games to be continued in the AT mode, the BB will be played again during the reset AT mode. If given a chance to cause a state transition to cause AT mode to be reset (if AT mode lasts longer than BB state), then BB state again during reset AT mode. There may be a case where the chance to cause the transition to the AT mode to be reset is not given (the AT mode does not last longer than the BB state). Also, even if there is no chance to cause a transition to the BB state again during the reset AT mode to reset the AT mode (when the AT mode does not last longer than the BB state) good.

(27) By using the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first game in the BB state, the number of medals to be paid out becomes a specific number or other than the specific number. Although the configuration in which the advantageous interval ends or does not end based on the operation has been described, at least the configuration may be such that the advantageous interval ends or does not end based on the operation of the player in the BB state. . For example, at least during the BB state, a 2-bet game as well as a 3-bet game can be executed. The advantageous section may end when the player plays the 2-bet game.

(28) The transition to the BB state is defined as the first specific operation for challenging the end of the advantageous section, and the end condition is satisfied in the first game of the BB state (7 medals are paid out). ) as a second specific operation to end the advantageous interval, and failure to satisfy the end condition in the first game in the BB state as a third specific operation to prevent the advantageous interval from ending, Information indicating that the termination condition could not be satisfied is stored as a specific flag, but the first specific operation, the second specific operation, and the third specific operation are not limited to the above, At least an operation performed by a player may be used.

For example, normal replay A to normal replay C are made to have different winning replays according to the order of operation of stop switches 42 to 44, and when these normal replays A to C are won, predetermined replay winnings are established. (The stop switches 42 to 44 could be operated in the operation order corresponding to the predetermined re-game winning) as the second specific operation, and the predetermined re-game winning could not be established. (The stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the operation order corresponding to the predetermined replay winning, and a replay winning different from the predetermined replay winning is established) as a third specific operation. good too.

In addition, as the first specific operation, it may be a stop operation that establishes a transition result winning that causes a transition to an RT state in which the probability of winning one of the replays is high, and the state transition is not essential. For example, it may be a stop operation that establishes a predetermined specific small winning combination (for example, watermelon) winning. In these cases, it is preferable that an operation different from the first specific operation is allowed in the game. More specifically, an operation that does not result in the transition result winning or an operation that does not result in a specific minor winning combination. is allowed.

(29) In the third embodiment, the specific flag is cleared by playing a predetermined number of games (100 games) after the specific flag is set. Although the output indicates that the ceiling game number can be reset, it may be configured not to notify that the ceiling game number can be reset. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which determines whether the said alerting|reporting is performed by lottery.

(30) In the third embodiment, the specific flag is cleared by playing a predetermined number of games (100 games) after the specific flag is set. The number of games until the specific flag is cleared may be different depending on the predetermined number of games. Which predetermined number of games is to be set may be determined by lottery.

(31) In the advantageous section transition process, special information is used to perform the AT mode transition lottery and ceiling game number lottery. may be configured to be affected by Specifically, for example, even if the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the same value of the BB payout counter, the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is the first result (for example, , Cherry A), a second result different from the first result (for example, Cherry B) is more likely to be won in the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition.

(32) In the advantageous section transition process, special information is used to perform the AT mode transition lottery and ceiling game number lottery at the time of transition. It is good also as a structure which influences. Specifically, for example, even when the same value of the BB payout counter is used to perform the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition, the difference from the first set value is greater than when the first set value is set. A configuration may be adopted in which it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition when the second set value is set.

(33) Although the advantageous interval is terminated at the first game or the like in the BB state, the advantageous interval may not be terminated, but only the AT mode or CZ mode may be terminated.

(34) In the advantageous interval transition process, special information is used to perform the AT mode transition lottery and ceiling game number lottery. , the execution lottery for the suggestive effect may be performed using the special information.

(35) By shifting to the BB state, the winning probability of the pressing order bell may be higher than in the previous state (normal game state or carry-over state).

(36) The conditions for ending the advantageous section may be different from those described above. Specifically, the upper limit number of games (1500 games) may be increased or decreased. Also, the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets) may be larger or smaller than the above. Further, although the advantageous section always ends when the AT mode ends, the advantageous section may not end even when the AT mode ends. The case where the advantageous section does not end when the AT mode ends is, for example, a configuration in which an end lottery is executed when the AT mode ends, and the advantageous section does not end when the end lottery is not won. may be Also, when the number of games remaining until the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous interval is equal to or greater than a predetermined number when the AT mode ends, the advantageous interval may not end or may be difficult to end, or it may become difficult to win the ending lottery. For example, it may be configured such that whether or not to end the advantageous interval when the AT mode ends depends on the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval.

(37) Although the description has been made on the assumption that the gaming machine is capable of executing only 3-bet games, it may be configured to be capable of executing 2-bet games and 1-bet games as well. In this case, for example, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game can be executed, and it is possible to win the 1st BB or the 2nd BB in the 2-bet game, and it is impossible to win the 1st BB or the 2nd BB in the 3-bet game. In addition, 2-bet games allow the 1st BB and 2nd BB wins, and 3-bet games do not allow the 1st BB and 2nd BB wins. In addition, the 3-bet game increases the net increase in the number of coins per game during the AT mode and increases the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery than the 2-bet game. In this way, the AT mode is consumed in the 3-bet game, or the CZ mode transition lottery is won, and after the end of the AT mode or the CZ mode, it is switched to the 2-bet game to switch to the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB. It is possible to provide a game feature such as resetting the advantageous section according to the state. In this case, in the 3-bet game, it is possible to avoid unintentionally establishing the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize (terminating the advantageous section).

(38) Although the push order notification is generated when the AT mode flag is not set, the push order notification may be generated even if the AT mode flag is not set in the advantageous section. . In this case, for example, the AT mode may be configured to generate the push order notification more easily than the normal mode, and the AT mode may be configured to generate the push order notification more easily than the CZ mode. Further, it may be configured such that the pressing order notification is more likely to occur in the CZ mode than in the normal mode.

(39) In a game in which the AT mode is started, or in a game in which the winning of a lottery for transition to the AT mode is notified, a freeze effect is provided in which the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disabled for a predetermined period of time. It is good also as a structure which generates. In this case, by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 during the invalid period, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R temporarily stop a predetermined combination of symbols to start the AT mode, or to perform a lottery for shifting to the AT mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which notification of winning is performed. After temporarily stopping a predetermined pattern combination, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated again during the invalid period, and after the invalid period has elapsed, the lottery result of the game is based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is preferable to have a configuration in which stop control corresponding to is performed.

(40) In the first embodiment, if the BB payout counter is not 7, it is set so that the lottery for transition to AT mode will not be won. A configuration may be adopted in which a mode transition lottery can be won. In this case, if the BB payout counter is 7, the winning probability should be set higher than if it is other than 7.

(41) The special information used in the advantageous section transition process is not limited to one type, and may be configured to use a plurality of types of special information. For example, as the special information, a BB game counter and a BB payout counter are used to perform an AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition. ), the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition is won or is likely to be won. It is less than (10) and may be set so that it is more difficult or impossible to win the AT mode transition lottery at the time of transition than when the BB payout counter is equal to or greater than the specific number (30).

(42) Instead of transitioning to the BB state at the end of the AT mode and ending the AT mode, after the number of AT mode remaining games is 0 and the AT mode ends, a predetermined number of games (for example, 5) are played. If the interval is set to CZ mode or the like, and the BB state can be won during the CZ mode, the pressing order notification may be generated or easily generated in the first game in the BB state.

(43) It may be configured to shift to the BB state in a situation close to the upper limit number of games (1500) or the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section. In this case, for example, it is possible to shift to the BB state a predetermined number of games (for example, 5) before the upper limit number of games, or to shift to the BB state before a predetermined number of games (for example, 10) before the upper limit increase number (2400). . The predetermined number of games may be at least a number of games in which a game for shifting to the BB state and a game for setting the BB payout counter as special information to a specific number (7) can be played during the advantageous interval. . Further, the predetermined number may be a number that allows the game to be played in an advantageous interval for setting the BB payout counter as special information to a specific number (7), or the BB payout counter may be set to a specific number. It may be the number of sheets at which the advantageous section ends by doing so.

(44) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(45) A slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(46) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a game machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

(47) In the above embodiment, the game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, but the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the second result that can award a different profit than when the first result wins can be won, or the result of the mode in which no win is established in any of the results (push order bell) is set,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (by main controller 101) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state based on a predetermined advantageous transition condition (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section in the first section display processing by the main controller 101);
Advantageous termination means for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state based on a predetermined advantageous termination condition (a function of executing processing for terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main controller 101);
Specific processing execution means (function for executing advantageous section transition processing by main controller 101) capable of executing specific processing related to the mode notification when the advantageous transition device causes a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state. When,
with
A special result (first BB, second BB) that enables a transition to a special state advantageous to the player is set as a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the valid position, special transition means (bonus by main controller 101) for shifting to the special state function to perform state processing) and
Retaining means capable of reserving information corresponding to winning the special result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination does not stop at the valid position. (a function that enables carrying over the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag by the main control device 101);
Predetermined special information (BB payout counter, RT counter, etc.) and special information updating means (function for updating RT counter, BB payout counter, etc. by main control device 101),
The specific process execution means is a special means (advantageous state by main controller 101) capable of executing the specific process using at least the special information when the transition to the advantageous state is caused by the advantageous transition means in the special state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing processing when any of the BB state flags is set in section transition processing.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is the mode result, the first result winning is established if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, there are cases where the second result winning is established or none of the results are won, and mode notification including these first operation mode and second operation mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the mode notification is executed.

Mode notification is executed in an advantageous state and not executed in a normal state, but the advantageous state is more advantageous for the player, and furthermore, when shifting to the advantageous state, the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing relating to the mode notification. , in addition to the transition to the advantageous state, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the contents and results of the specific processing at the time of transition to the advantageous state, so that the degree of attention at the time of transition to the advantageous state is preferably increased. ing.

In addition, as the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a special result is set which enables transition to a special state as a so-called bonus that is reserved if no winning is established in the game, and an advantageous state is set during the special state. When the transition to the mode occurs, specific processing regarding mode notification is executed using special information that changes according to the progress of the special game including any game from the special result winning to the end of the special state. Therefore, by associating the progress of the bonus with the specific processing at the time of transition to the advantageous state, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that have never existed before. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the game.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the special information updating means updates the special information regardless of whether or not the special information is used in the specific processing.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the special information updated in the special game, such as the special state, is not the information dedicated to the specific process related to the mode notification. By doing so, when linking game information such as a game using mode notification and a special game such as a special state, it is clear that these games are games that are progressing completely separately. As a result, the effect of improving interest by associating both games is enhanced.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the special information updating means can update the special information in the normal state and can update the special information in the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, the special information is updated irrespective of whether or not there is an advantageous state in which the mode notification can be executed, and the special information is not information dedicated to specific processing related to the mode notification. clarified. By doing so, when linking game information such as a game using mode notification and a special game such as a special state, it is clear that these games are games that are progressing completely separately. As a result, the effect of improving interest by associating both games is enhanced.

Feature A4. When the advantageous end means causes a transition from the advantageous state to the normal state, the initialization means for executing the initialization processing of the advantageous information used in the advantageous state (when the advantageous section ends by the main controller 101 function to execute initialization processing),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the special information is not subject to the initialization processing by the initialization means.

When the advantageous state ends, the advantage information used in the advantageous state is initialized, thereby securing the independence of one advantageous state and ending the game when the advantageous state ends. In this case, it is possible to prevent the advantage/disadvantage from being handed over to the succeeding player. However, if the independence of the advantageous state is ensured too much, the game will be interrupted each time the advantageous state ends, which is not desirable in terms of increasing the interest in the game. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by using special information updated in a special game such as a special state, instead of the advantageous information used in the advantageous state, specific processing at the time of transition to the advantageous state is performed. It is also possible to take over the information during the advantageous state that ended earlier as special information, and it is possible to increase the relevance between the previous advantageous state and the subsequent advantageous state.

Feature A5. Special advantageous end means capable of ending the advantageous state in a specific game (for example, the first game in BB state) before the end game among the special games (the advantageous section by the main controller 101 is changed to the BB state A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process to end the game at the first game, etc.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous state may end in the specific game during the special game in which the special information is updated. Then, when the advantageous state is shifted to again after the advantageous state ends, the special information in the special game that overlaps with the advantageous state before the end may be used to perform the specific processing. With such a configuration, it is possible to associate information between one advantageous state and subsequent advantageous states using the special information updated in the special game.

Feature A6. The special means executes the specific processing using first special information as the special information, and the specific processing using second special information different from the first special information as the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the result of the specific process differs depending on whether it is executed or not.

According to the above configuration, not only the special information is used for the identification process, but also the result of the identification process differs depending on the type of the special information used. By doing so, the player's interest is focused on the progress of the special game so that the special information used for the specific process becomes the desired special information. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the special game.

Feature A7. When the lottery result by the lottery means in the special game is the first specified result, the special information update means updates the special information to the first special information, and the lottery result by the lottery means in the special game is the above The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein when the second identification result is different from the first identification result, the special information updating means updates the special information to the second special information.

According to the above configuration, the result of the subsequent specific process will differ depending on the lottery result of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the special game.

Feature A8. When the first specified pattern combination is stopped at the valid position in the special game, the special information updating means updates the special information to the first special information, and the first specified pattern combination is placed at the valid position in the special game. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or feature A7, wherein the special information updating means updates the special information to the second special information when a second specific pattern combination different from the pattern combination of (1) stops. .

According to the above configuration, the result of the subsequent specific process differs depending on the result of stopping the special game. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the special game.

Feature A9. When a first specific privilege is granted by the privilege granting means in the special game, the special information updating means updates the special information to the first special information, and the privilege granting means in the special game Any one of features A6 to A8, characterized in that when a second specific privilege different from the one specific privilege is given, the special information updating means updates the special information to the second special information The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the result of subsequent specific processing will differ depending on the privilege given in the special game. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the special game.

Feature A10. In the special game, the lottery result by the lottery means is the first predetermined result (push order bell win), and when the pattern combination corresponding to the first predetermined result stops at the effective position, the privilege granting means When a first specific privilege is granted, the lottery result by the lottery means in the special game is the second predetermined result (watermelon winning), and the pattern combination corresponding to the second predetermined result stops at the valid position. , the gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the second specific privilege is granted by the privilege granting means.

According to the above configuration, the privilege to be given differs depending on the lottery result of the special game, and the result of the subsequent specific processing differs depending on the privilege. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the special game.

Feature A11. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the symbol combination corresponding to the first result stops at the effective position and the When the first specific privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, it is in the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10, wherein the combination of symbols corresponding to the second result is stopped and the second specific privilege is granted by the privilege granting means.

According to the above configuration, the updated special information differs between when the first specific privilege is granted and when the second specific privilege is granted, which affects the result of the specifying process. In this configuration, whether the first specific privilege is granted or the second specific privilege is granted depends on the operation mode of the stop operation means at the time of winning the mode result. By doing so, it is possible to attract a great deal of attention to the operation mode of the stop operation means when the mode result is won.

In particular, in this gaming machine, mode notification may be executed if the game in which the mode result is won is in an advantageous state. It is also possible to realize game characteristics such as terminating the state, then re-shifting to the advantageous state, and performing specific processing using the adjusted special information. Therefore, it is possible to associate one advantageous state with a subsequent advantageous state while adjusting the special information by mode notification.

Feature A12. Special advantageous end means capable of ending the advantageous state in a specific game (for example, the first game in BB state) before the end game among the special games (the advantageous section by the main controller 101 is changed to the BB state function to execute processing to end at the first game etc.),
The mode notification means is a specific mode capable of executing the mode notification in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result before the advantageous state is terminated by the special advantageous ending means. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized by comprising notifying means (a function of executing a process for notifying the pressing order in the first game in the BB state by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81). .

According to the above configuration, when the aspect result is won during the special state, the special information is updated to the first special information by establishing the first result prize in the aspect result and obtaining the first specific privilege. It is possible to adjust whether the special information is updated to the second special information by establishing the second result prize winning and obtaining the second specific result by the mode notification at the time of winning the mode result. . On top of that, when the advantageous state ends in the specific game, if the further special information is not updated until the transition to the advantageous state, the specific processing is performed using the first special information or the second special information. will be done. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as adjusting the result of the specific processing at the time of the next transition to the advantageous state by using the mode notification during the previous advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A13. As the advantageous states, the first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the state notification by the state notification means is likely to be executed, and the second advantageous state (normal mode, CZ mode) in which the state notification is less likely to be executed than the first advantageous state mode) and are set,
The advantageous termination means is configured to end the advantageous state and shift to the normal state by determining that the advantageous termination condition is satisfied when a termination condition in the first advantageous state is satisfied,
The special advantageous ending means is capable of ending the advantageous state in the specific game regardless of whether or not the termination condition in the first advantageous state is satisfied,
When the number of games played until the first advantageous state ends is the first number of games, and when the number of games is the second number of games different from the first number of games, the specific mode notification means The gaming machine according to feature A12, characterized in that easiness of execution of the mode notification is different.

According to the above configuration, the execution rate of mode notification by the specific mode notification means differs depending on the number of games played until the first advantageous state ends. In a situation where the mode notification is likely to be executed, or in a situation where the number of games played until the end of the first advantageous state still exists, the mode notification is easily executed. Special information is provided by the mode notification. It is possible to perform specific processing in a state where the adjustment of is performed, and to adjust the advantage of the transition to the advantageous state and the like. By doing so, according to the degree of progress of the first advantageous state, which is advantageous to the player, among the advantageous states, the special information given to the specific processing at the time of re-shifting to the advantageous state after that can be well managed. can be done.

Feature A14. When the special means executes the specific processing using the first special information as the special information, the special means executes the specific processing using the second special information as the special information. Also, the result of the specific processing is a configuration that is likely to be advantageous for the player,
Characteristic feature A13, characterized in that the specific mode notification means is configured to facilitate the execution of the mode notification for the first operation mode as the number of games played until the first advantageous state ends increases. game machine.

By operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode when the mode result is won, the first result winning can be established, and as a result, the special information is updated to the first special information. In this case, in the above configuration, the result of the specifying process tends to be more advantageous when the specifying process is performed using the first special information than when using the second special information, and the second special information is used. As the number of remaining games in the first advantageous state increases, the mode notification of the first operation mode is more likely to be performed by the specific mode notification means. In addition, it is possible to make up for the end of the advantageous state by the special advantageous ending means in the specific processing at the time of the next transition to the advantageous state.

Feature A15. When the special means executes the specific processing using the first special information as the special information, the special means executes the specific processing using the second special information as the special information. Also, the result of the specific processing is a configuration that is likely to be advantageous for the player,
Characteristic feature A13 or characteristic feature A13 characterized in that the specific mode informing means is configured such that the smaller the number of games played until the end of the first advantageous state, the easier it is to execute the mode informing of the first operation mode. A gaming machine described in A14.

By operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode when the mode result is won, the first result winning can be established, and as a result, the special information is updated to the first special information. In this case, in the above configuration, the result of the specifying process tends to be more advantageous when the specifying process is performed using the first special information than when using the second special information, and the second special information is used. The smaller the number of remaining games in the one-advantage state, the easier it is for the specific mode reporting means to report the mode of the first operation mode.

Here, in order to receive the benefit of updating the special information to the first special information by the specific mode notification means, it is necessary to cause at least a special result winning or a transition to a special state. Therefore, in order to sufficiently provide the benefit of the first advantageous state and furthermore, in order to obtain an advantageous result in the specific processing at the next transition to the advantageous state, The transition to the special state must be caused at the end of the first advantageous state, and it is possible to greatly improve the game performance just before the end of the first advantageous state.

Feature A16. When the information corresponding to the winning of the special result is reserved by the reservation means, in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (losing result), the While it is permitted to stop the special pattern combination, in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the special result, stopping the special pattern combination at the effective position is restricted. The game machine according to any one of features A13 to A15, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, for example, in a configuration such as feature A15 in which the benefit of the specific mode notification means is more likely to be received just before the end of the first advantageous state, the special result is obtained just before the end of the first advantageous state as much as possible. You will want to. However, since the first advantageous state may end without a special result, it is possible to preferably improve the gameability just before the first advantageous state ends. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which special result prize winning is restricted unless a special result is obtained, it is possible to make it difficult for special result prize winning to be realized unintentionally in a situation where special result prize winning is reserved. To make it difficult to cause an event in which an advantageous state is terminated by a special advantageous ending means even though there are many remaining games just after the start of a first advantageous state, as in feature A14. can be done.

Feature A17. Bet amount setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for setting the bet amount of the game value to be awarded to the game,
The lottery means sets a second bet amount (2 bet) different from the first bet amount when the first bet amount (3 bet) is set by the bet amount setting means. A lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the case, and when the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means rather than when the first bet amount is set. The gaming machine according to feature A16, wherein the probability of obtaining the special result is set to be higher in the case of .

According to the above configuration, when the first number of bets is set, the lottery is more advantageous than the second number of bets. On the premise, by switching to the second number of bets, it is possible to achieve a special result winning relatively easily. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon in which the first advantageous state ends without the special result winning being established.

Feature A18. When the number of games played or the number of increases in the game value in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit, the advantageous end means terminates the advantageous state by determining that the advantageous end condition is satisfied and returns to the normal state. It is a configuration that can be migrated,
Preliminary grasping means (remaining game number management processing and remaining number management processing by main control unit 101) capable of grasping that the upper limit number is reached in the advantageous state before the upper limit number is reached function),
The specific mode notification means is configured to more easily execute the mode notification when the upper limit number is ascertained by the prior ascertaining means than when the upper limit number is not ascertained. The game machine according to any one of features A12 to A17, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, when the number of games played or the number of increases in the game value in the advantageous state reaches the upper limit, the advantageous state ends, so that the advantageous state continues endlessly, or the game value increases. It is possible to avoid giving a lot of game values in a single advantageous state, and to ensure the soundness of the game. On the other hand, by setting such an upper limit to the advantageous state, for example, when it is quickly grasped that the upper limit is reached, the game after that becomes a so-called digest game, and the advantageous state continues until the upper limit. Despite this, the degree of attention to the game may be extremely reduced. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when it is known in advance that the upper limit will be reached, mode notification by the specific mode notification means is facilitated. It is possible to perform advantageous specific processing at the next transition to an advantageous state, and it is possible to suppress the above-described decrease in the degree of attention.

Feature A19. Special advantageous end means capable of ending the advantageous state in a specific game (for example, the first game in BB state) before the end game among the special games (the advantageous section by the main controller 101 is changed to the BB state function to execute processing to end at the first game etc.),
As the advantageous states, the first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the state notification by the state notification means is likely to be executed, and the second advantageous state (normal mode, CZ mode) in which the state notification is less likely to be executed than the first advantageous state mode) and are set,
The advantageous termination means is configured to end the advantageous state and shift to the normal state by determining that the advantageous termination condition is satisfied when a termination condition in the first advantageous state is satisfied,
The special advantageous ending means is capable of ending the advantageous state in the specific game regardless of whether or not the termination condition in the first advantageous state is satisfied,
increasing means for increasing the number of remaining games in the first advantageous state (function for executing processing to add the number of AT mode games by the main controller 101);
means for executing the number-of-games notification corresponding to the number of remaining games in the first advantageous state (function for executing the number-of-remaining-games display by the display control device 81);
When the number of remaining games in the first advantageous state is increased by the increasing means, after the notification of the number of games reaches a predetermined number, an increase notification ( Equipped with an increase notification means (function for executing the post-boarding notification by the display control device 81) for executing the post-boarding notification),
When the number of remaining games in the first advantageous state becomes a specific number (third predetermined number) smaller than the predetermined number, a specific notification ( The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, further comprising specific notification execution means (a function of executing a winning waiting effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a winning waiting effect.

According to the above configuration, in the case where the number of remaining games in the first advantageous state increases, an increase notification of the increase is performed when the notified remaining number of games reaches a predetermined number as so-called post-addition notification. Therefore, the timing at which the number of remaining games is increased and the timing at which the increase notification is performed may differ, thereby improving the playability of the first advantageous state. When the configuration of feature A1 is applied to such game characteristics, although the increase notification was scheduled to be performed in the first advantageous state, the transition to the special state is caused and the advantageous state ends. case is of concern. In that regard, in the above configuration, after the specific number is smaller than the predetermined number that can be added, it is configured to notify that the situation should cause the transition to the special state. As described above, it is possible to preferably avoid the event that the advantageous state is ended due to the transition to the special state even though the number of games for the post-addition notification remains.

It should be noted that the "specific number" is, for example, "a number smaller than the number of games set when shifting to the first advantageous state", so that the advantageous state is terminated by the transition to the special state, and the advantageous state is reached. It is possible to ensure the significance of causing re-transition to the state.

Feature A20. When the number of games increased by the increasing means is the first number of games, the increase notification means sets the number of games as the predetermined number to the first predetermined number (remaining 11 games). On the other hand, when the number of games increased by the increasing means is the second number of games different from the first number of games, the increase notification is performed at the second number when the notification of the number of games is less than the specific number. It is configured to be executed after reaching a predetermined number (one game remaining),
In the game after the game number notification reaches the specific number, notification lottery means for executing a notification lottery to determine whether to execute the specific notification (whether to execute the winning waiting effect by the display control device 81) function to execute notification lottery),
The specific notification execution means determines that the increase notification by the increase notification means is not determined, and the result of the notification lottery by the notification lottery means is the result corresponding to executing the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature A19, characterized in that it is configured to execute the specific notification when the game is played.

According to the above configuration, according to the number of games increased by the increasing means, the timing of executing the increase notification as the additional notification is different, and the increase notification is performed at the number of games smaller than the specific number at which the specific notification is performed. There are cases where it will be done. Then, since the specific notification that should cause the transition to the special state is executed when the increase notification is not performed and when the notification lottery is won, the game number notification is a specific number It is possible to make the player play the game while making them expect that the increase notification may be performed in the situation where the specific notification is not performed in the situation where the number of players is less than that. Therefore, in the game in which the transition to the special state is caused during the first advantageous state to end the advantageous state, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the scene where the number of remaining games is small.

Feature A21. A first special state (first BB state) and a second special state (second BB state) different from the first special state are set as the special states,
Even if the special information to be used is the same when the special means executes the specific process in the first special state and the specific process in the second special state, The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A20, characterized in that it is configured so that the result of the specific process can be different.

According to the above configuration, even with the same special information, the result of the specific processing may differ depending on whether the special state when the specific processing is executed is the first special state or the second special state. By doing so, interest in winning a special result that causes a transition to any special state and which special result is reserved is increased, and specific processing at the time of transition to an advantageous state is used. It is possible to improve playability.

The invention described in the above features A1 to A21 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features A1 to A21, features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H12 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, but the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the second result that can award a different profit than when the first result wins can be won, or the result of the mode in which no win is established in any of the results (push order bell) is set,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (by main controller 101) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state based on a predetermined advantageous transition condition (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section in the first section display processing by the main controller 101);
Advantageous termination means for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state based on a predetermined advantageous termination condition (a function of executing processing for terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main controller 101);
When the advantageous transition means causes a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state, a specific process execution means ( a function of executing processing when transitioning to an advantageous section by the main controller 101;
When the game state is the first game state (BB state), the special information is permitted to be updated from the first special information (BB payout counter=0) to the second special information (BB payout counter=7). On the other hand, when the game state is a second game state different from the first game state, updating of the special information from the first special information to the second special information is restricted. cage,
The result of the specific processing is more advantageous for the player when the specific processing is executed using the second special information than when the specific processing is executed using the first special information. A gaming machine characterized by being set to

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is the mode result, the first result winning is established if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, there are cases where the second result winning is established or none of the results are won, and mode notification including these first operation mode and second operation mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the mode notification is executed.

Mode notification is executed in an advantageous state and not executed in a normal state, but the advantageous state is more advantageous for the player, and furthermore, when shifting to the advantageous state, the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing relating to the mode notification. , in addition to the transition to the advantageous state, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the contents and results of the specific processing at the time of transition to the advantageous state, so that the degree of attention at the time of transition to the advantageous state is preferably increased. ing.

The special information used for the specific process may be updated from the first special information to the second special information. is performed, the result of the specific process is set to be more advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to cause the transition to the advantageous state in a situation where the special information is updated to the second special information as much as possible.

Further, updating from the first special information to the second special information is allowed in the first game state, but is restricted in the second game state. It is advantageous to occur at By adopting such a configuration, in the game property in which the degree of advantage is changed by utilizing the state notification, not only is the transition to the advantageous state in which the state notification is executed occur, but also the It is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing when the transition to the advantageous state occurs, and it is possible to realize an unprecedentedly interesting game.

In addition, by using the above configuration, there is no need to change the processing configuration of the specific processing, such as using or not using special information according to the game state, and the processing configuration can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to suitably prevent a processing error that occurs when the processing configuration of the specific processing is different for each game state and fraudulent actions that use it.

Feature B2. In the first gaming state, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined update result (for example, a push order bell), the first special information can be updated to the second special information. ,
Characteristic B1, characterized in that in the second game state, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the update result, the update from the first special information to the second special information is not performed. game machine.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature B1, and even if it is configured to be updated to the second special information if the update result is obtained in the first game state, in the second game state, the update result and It is clarified that the second special information will not be updated even if it becomes. By adopting such a configuration, if the same update result is obtained, the advantage of the first game state is greater. It is possible to set a difference in the substantial advantage between the first game state and the second game state.

Feature B3. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the first game state is the updated result (push order bell) and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the second game state is the updated result are common. The game machine according to feature B2, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set a difference in the substantial advantage between the first game state and the second game state without differentiating the probability of winning as a result of the update. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to add excitement to the game and improve the interest in the game.

Feature B4. A privilege given by the privilege giving means when the pattern combination corresponding to the update result stops at the valid position in the first game state, and a privilege given at the valid position corresponding to the update result in the second game state. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, wherein the privilege given by the privilege giving means when the combination of symbols stops is common.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set a difference in the substantial advantage between the first game state and the second game state without differentiating the benefits given when the update result wins. Become. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to add excitement to the game and improve the interest in the game.

Feature B5. Means for updating the special information from the second special information to the first special information when the transition from the first game state to the second game state occurs (the BB state end in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101 A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of initializing a BB payout counter, etc., as a process for use.

According to the above configuration, even if the first special information is updated to the second special information during the first game state, if the transition to the advantageous state does not occur before the first game state ends, the Since the 2 special information is updated to the 1st special information, in addition to updating to the 2nd special information in the 1st game state, after the 1st game state is updated to the 2nd special information The transition to the advantageous state can be expected before the end of the game, and the amusement of the game during the first game state can be improved.

Feature B6. The update from the first special information to the second special information in the first gaming state is performed based on occurrence of a predetermined update opportunity (push order bell winning),
The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the first game state is set to end when the predetermined update opportunity occurs.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the first special information is updated to the second special information in the first game state, it is expected that a predetermined update trigger for the update will occur. On the other hand, since the setting is such that the first game state may end when the predetermined update opportunity occurs, in order to perform the specific processing using the second special information, the predetermined When an update opportunity occurs, it is necessary not only to update the second special information but also to prevent the first game state from ending, thereby dramatically increasing attention when a predetermined update opportunity occurs. becomes possible.

Feature B7. The update from the first special information to the second special information in the first gaming state is performed based on occurrence of a predetermined update opportunity (push order bell winning),
Equipped with a special advantageous end means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in the first game of the BB state by the main control device 101, etc.) capable of ending the advantageous state in the specific game in the first game state. ,
The special advantageous ending means is capable of ending the advantageous state when the predetermined renewal opportunity occurs in the specific game, and the predetermined renewal opportunity does not occur in the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or feature B6, characterized in that it is possible to end the advantageous state if the game is in the state of advantage.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous state ends in the specific game in the first game state, and regardless of whether or not the second special information is updated in the specific game, in the specific game The advantage ends. In this case, if the special information is not updated when re-shifting to the advantageous state, the advantageous state ends without being updated when the advantageous state ends with the update to the second special information. It is more advantageous for the player than the case. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the specific game in the first game state.

Feature B8. Equipped with a special advantageous end means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in the first game of the BB state by the main control device 101, etc.) capable of ending the advantageous state in the specific game in the first game state. ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the first game state can be continued even when the advantageous state is ended by the special advantageous end means.

According to the above configuration, the transition to the advantageous state can occur during the first game state, and even if the advantageous state ends, the first game state continues, and these advantageous state and the first game state. It is clarified that it is a game state in which and progresses in parallel. In such a configuration, by using the special information updated during the first game state for the specific processing at the time of transition to the advantageous state, it becomes possible to associate the advantageous state and the first game state well. .

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the first special information is an initial value of the special information.

According to the above configuration, in the first game state, the special information can be updated from the first special information as the initial value to the second special information, and in the second game state, the special information is the initial value. remain. With such a configuration, the configuration for holding the special information as the first special information in the second game state can be made relatively simple. It is a configuration that should be kept.

Feature B10. As the special information, at least the result of the specific processing when using the first special information and the result of the specific processing when using the second special information are stored as a special information group (at the time of transition A storage means (various table storage area 105a) for storing an AT mode transition lottery table, etc.),
The specific process executing means executes the specific process using the special information and the special information group in the first game state, and uses the special information and the special information group in the second game state. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized by being configured to execute the specific process.

According to the above configuration, the first special information is associated with the result of the specific processing, and the second special information is associated with the result of the specific processing using a so-called lottery table as a special information group. In any gaming state, if only the lottery table and the special information can be obtained, the specific processing can be executed with a common processing configuration. Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration and suppression of fraud can be realized.

The invention described in the above features B1 to B10 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features B1 to B10, features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H12 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, but the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the second result that can award a different profit than when the first result wins can be won, or the result of the mode in which no win is established in any of the results (push order bell) is set,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (by main controller 101) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state based on a predetermined advantageous transition condition (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section in the first section display processing by the main controller 101);
Advantageous termination means for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state based on a predetermined advantageous termination condition (a function of executing processing for terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main controller 101);
Specific processing execution means (function for executing advantageous section transition processing by main controller 101) capable of executing specific processing related to the mode notification when the advantageous transition device causes a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state. When,
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific process executing means is configured to execute the specific process in a game subsequent to a game in which the advantageous transition condition has been established.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is the mode result, the first result winning is established if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, there are cases where the second result winning is established or none of the results are won, and mode notification including these first operation mode and second operation mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the mode notification is executed.

Mode notification is executed in an advantageous state and not executed in a normal state, but the advantageous state is more advantageous for the player, and furthermore, when shifting to the advantageous state, the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing relating to the mode notification. , in addition to the transition to the advantageous state, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the contents and results of the specific processing at the time of transition to the advantageous state, so that the degree of attention at the time of transition to the advantageous state is preferably increased. ing.

Here, the transition to the advantageous state is made based on the establishment of the advantageous transition condition, and the advantageous state ends based on the establishment of the advantageous end condition. In this case, for example, when the advantageous state ends in the game in which the advantageous end condition is satisfied, and the advantageous transition condition is satisfied in the next game, and the transition to the advantageous state occurs, the advantageous state ends. There may be doubt as to whether the next game will be advantageous or normal. In other words, when a game in which an advantageous transition condition is satisfied is caused to transition to an advantageous state, the game becomes a game in an advantageous state, while the advantageous transition condition is satisfied in a normal state. Therefore, a game in which the advantageous transition condition is established can be interpreted as a game in an advantageous state, but can also be interpreted as a game in a normal state.

In this case, if a specific process related to mode notification is executed in a game in which the advantageous transition condition is established, it can be interpreted that the specific process related to mode notification is performed during an advantageous state, and during a normal state. It can also be interpreted as going to If the processing related to mode notification is executed in the normal state, there is a possibility that the significance of distinguishing between the advantageous state in which mode notification can be performed and the normal state in which mode notification cannot be performed may be lost. be.

Therefore, as in the above-described configuration, the specific processing related to the mode notification to be executed at the time of transition to the advantageous state is configured to be performed in the game following the game in which the advantageous transition condition is established, so that the specific processing can be reliably performed. It is performed in a game in an advantageous state, and it is possible to set the advantageous state, etc., when shifting to the advantageous state while preventing the significance of distinguishing the advantageous state from the normal state from being lost.

Feature C2. Advantageous determination means (function for executing advantageous section transition lottery processing by main controller 101) for executing determination of establishment of the advantageous transition condition according to the lottery result of the lottery means,
The advantageous determination means, when executing the establishment determination in the normal state, is more likely to determine that the advantageous transition condition is established than to determine that the advantageous transition condition is not established. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which is set to increase.

In the above configuration, the advantageous transition condition is likely to be established in the normal state, and the concern described in the feature C1, such as transition from the advantageous state to the normal state and establishment of the advantageous transition condition in the next game, is likely to occur. . Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature C1 to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a specific process at the time of transition to the advantageous state while not losing the significance of distinguishing between the advantageous state and the normal state. It becomes possible.

In addition, the above-described configuration includes "advantage determination means (function for executing advantageous section transition lottery processing by main The game machine according to feature C1, wherein the determining means always determines that the advantageous transition condition is established when the establishment determination is executed in the normal state.

Feature C3. Advantageous determination means (function for executing advantageous section transition lottery processing by main controller 101) for executing determination of establishment of the advantageous transition condition according to the lottery result of the lottery means,
Characteristic C1 characterized in that the advantageous determination means executes the success determination when the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell) that is most likely to be won in the lottery by the lottery means. Or the gaming machine according to feature C2.

In the above configuration, the advantageous transition condition is likely to be established in the normal state, and the concern described in the feature C1, such as transition from the advantageous state to the normal state and establishment of the advantageous transition condition in the next game, is likely to occur. . Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature C1 to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a specific process at the time of transition to the advantageous state while not losing the significance of distinguishing between the advantageous state and the normal state. It becomes possible.

Feature C4. The advantageous states are a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is likely to be performed, and a second advantageous state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is less likely to be performed than in the first advantageous state. (Normal mode, CZ mode) and are set,
Transition determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) for executing transition determination for transitioning from the second advantageous state to the first advantageous state in the advantageous state;
When the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first advantageous state, first transition means (main controller 101) for transitioning from the second advantageous state to the first advantageous state A function that executes processing for shifting to AT mode when AT mode transition is won by
When the number of games executed in the second advantageous state reaches a predetermined number of specific games, regardless of the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means, or the transition determination by the transition determination means is performed. a second transition means for transitioning to the first advantageous state (a function of executing a process for shifting to the AT mode based on reaching the ceiling by the main controller 101);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the specific process executing means is capable of executing at least the process of setting the specific number of games as the specific process.

According to the above configuration, the specific process executed upon transition to the advantageous state includes at least the process of setting the specific number of games as the number of ceiling games. Such setting of the number of ceiling games is a process that should be executed as early as possible when the transition to the advantageous state occurs. , the advantage in the normal state greatly varies depending on the number of ceiling games, which is not preferable. Therefore, such a process is configured to be performed in the specific process, and the specific process is configured to be executed in the next game in which the advantageous transition condition is established, so that the game can be played after surely shifting to the advantageous state. In addition, the number of ceiling games can be set in the shortest game.

Feature C5. The advantageous states are a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is likely to be performed, and a second advantageous state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is less likely to be performed than in the first advantageous state. (Normal mode, CZ mode) and are set,
Transition determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) for executing transition determination for transitioning from the second advantageous state to the first advantageous state in the advantageous state;
When the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first advantageous state, first transition means (main controller 101) for transitioning from the second advantageous state to the first advantageous state A function that executes processing for shifting to AT mode when AT mode transition is won by
with
The specific process execution means according to any one of characteristics C1 to C4, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing at least a process of determining transition to the first advantageous state as the specific process. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the determination of transition to at least the first advantageous state can be performed in the specific process executed upon transition to the advantageous state. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to start the advantageous state from the first advantageous state, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game that transitions to the advantageous state. By executing such determination of transition to the first advantageous state as early as possible when transitioning to the advantageous state, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the advantageous state has started in the first advantageous state. If the transition determination is executed in the game in the normal state before the transition to the advantageous state, the advantage in the normal state will greatly differ depending on the result of the transition determination, which is not preferable. Therefore, such a process is configured to be performed in the specific process, and the specific process is configured to be executed in the next game in which the advantageous transition condition is established, so that the game can be played after surely shifting to the advantageous state. In addition, it is possible to determine whether to shift to the first advantageous state in the shortest game.

Feature C6. The specific process executing means is configured to execute the specific process when the starting operation means is operated in the game subsequent to the game in which the advantageous transition condition is established. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the specific process is executed at the start of the game next to the game in which the advantageous transition condition is established, and the specific process is executed at the shortest timing when the transition to the advantageous state is reliably generated. becomes. By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform various settings when transitioning to the advantageous state.

Feature C7. In a game in which the advantageous transition condition is established, a storage means (a function of executing a process of setting an advantageous section flag by the main control unit 101) for storing advantageous information corresponding to the advantageous state in a predetermined storage area. prepared,
The mode notification means can execute the mode notification in a game in which the starting operation means is operated in a situation where the advantageous information is stored, and the starting operation means can be executed in a situation where the advantageous information is not stored. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the mode notification cannot be executed in the operated game.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous information is stored in the game in which the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, and it is clarified that the next game and subsequent games are in an advantageous state in which mode notification can be executed. In other words, in a game in which the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, since no advantageous information is stored at the start of the game, mode notification cannot be executed and the normal state is entered. By applying the configuration of the characteristic C1 to such a configuration, it becomes clearer that the specific process is executed in the advantageous state instead of the normal state.

Feature C8. The advantageous transition condition can be established when the starting operation means is operated,
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the storage means stores the advantageous information when the advantageous transition condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous transition condition can be established when the starting operation means is operated, and the advantageous information is stored when the advantageous transition condition is established. With such a configuration, it can be interpreted that the game in which the advantageous information is stored is in an advantageous state, and the significance of executing the specific process in the next game is enhanced as in feature C1.

Feature C9. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, but the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the second result that can award a different profit than when the first result wins can be won, or the result of the mode in which no win is established in any of the results (push order bell) is set,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (by main controller 101) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state based on a predetermined advantageous transition condition (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section in the first section display processing by the main controller 101);
Advantageous termination means for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state based on a predetermined advantageous termination condition (a function of executing processing for terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main controller 101);
Specific processing execution means (function for executing advantageous section transition processing by main controller 101) capable of executing specific processing related to the mode notification when the advantageous transition device causes a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state. When,
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific process executing means is configured to execute the specific process when the established game in which the advantageous transition condition is established is terminated.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is the mode result, the first result winning is established if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, there are cases where the second result winning is established or none of the results are won, and mode notification including these first operation mode and second operation mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the mode notification is executed.

Mode notification is executed in an advantageous state and not executed in a normal state, but the advantageous state is more advantageous for the player, and furthermore, when shifting to the advantageous state, the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing relating to the mode notification. , in addition to the transition to the advantageous state, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the contents and results of the specific processing at the time of transition to the advantageous state, so that the degree of attention at the time of transition to the advantageous state is preferably increased. ing.

Here, the transition to the advantageous state is made based on the establishment of the advantageous transition condition, and the advantageous state ends based on the establishment of the advantageous end condition. In this case, for example, when the advantageous state ends in the game in which the advantageous end condition is satisfied, and the advantageous transition condition is satisfied in the next game, and the transition to the advantageous state occurs, the advantageous state ends. Doubts may arise as to whether the next game will be advantageous or normal. In other words, when a game in which an advantageous transition condition is satisfied is caused to transition to an advantageous state, the game becomes a game in an advantageous state, while the advantageous transition condition is satisfied in a normal state. Therefore, a game in which the advantageous transition condition is established can be interpreted as a game in an advantageous state, but can also be interpreted as a game in a normal state.

In this case, assuming that a specific process related to mode notification is executed at the start of a game in which the advantageous transition condition is established, it is interpreted that the specific process related to the mode notification is executed before shifting to an advantageous state. It is possible. Then, there is a possibility that the significance of distinguishing between the advantageous state in which mode notification can be executed and the normal state in which mode notification cannot be executed may be lost.

Therefore, as in the above-described configuration, the specific processing related to the state notification to be executed upon transition to the advantageous state is configured to be performed when the game in which the advantageous transition condition is established is terminated, so that the game itself that executes the specific processing Even in the normal state, if the next game is in the advantageous state, the result of the specific processing can be reflected in the game in the advantageous state, and the significance of distinguishing between the advantageous state and the normal state is not lost. While doing so, it becomes possible to set the advantageous state and the like when shifting to the advantageous state.

Note that the configurations limited by the features C1 to C8 may be applied individually to the feature C9, or may be applied in combination. may be applied, or some configurations may be applied in combination.

The invention described in the features C1 to C9 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features C1 to C9, features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H12 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, but the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the second result that can award a different profit than when the first result wins can be won, or the result of the mode in which no win is established in any of the results (push order bell) is set,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (by main controller 101) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state based on a predetermined advantageous transition condition (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section in the first section display processing by the main controller 101);
Advantageous termination means for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state based on a predetermined advantageous termination condition (a function of executing processing for terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main controller 101);
with
A special result (first BB, second BB) that enables a transition to a special state advantageous to the player is set as a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the valid position, special transition means (bonus by main controller 101) for shifting to the special state function to perform state processing) and
Retaining means capable of reserving information corresponding to winning the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination does not stop at the valid position. (a function that enables carrying over the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag by the main control device 101);
Reservation number grasping means for grasping the number of games played while information corresponding to the winning of the special result is reserved by the reservation means (update processing of the RT game counter in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101) function) and
When the advantageous transition condition is satisfied in the special state, specific setting means (main control a function of executing AT mode transition lottery processing at the time of transition according to the RT game counter in the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section by the device 101;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is the mode result, the first result winning is established if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, there are cases where the second result winning is established or none of the results are won, and mode notification including these first operation mode and second operation mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the mode notification is executed.

Further, as the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a special result is set which enables a transition to a special state as a so-called bonus which is withheld if no winning is established in the game, and an advantageous state is set in the special state. , the degree of advantage of the advantageous state is set according to the number of games played from the special result winning until the transition to the special state occurs. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize game characteristics such as adjusting the game for establishing a bonus winning in order to advance the advantageous state advantageously when the bonus is won. Therefore, it is possible to associate a game using a special state as a so-called bonus state and a game using a mode notification according to the number of games played from winning a bonus to winning a prize, thereby realizing unprecedented new game characteristics. It becomes possible.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to characteristic D1, wherein the specific setting means sets the advantageous state to be shifted more advantageously as the number of games grasped by the reserved number grasping means is smaller.

According to the above configuration, the smaller the number of games required from the winning of the special result to the establishment of the special result winning, the more advantageous state can be set in the special state based on the special result winning. By doing so, the degree of attention of each game is preferably increased so as not to overlook the fact that the special result is won. Careful manipulation of the means will be required. When the special result winning can be established earlier, interest in establishing an advantageous transition condition in the special state is heightened, and the interest in the game during the special state is enhanced.

Feature D3. When the number of games grasped by the reserved number grasping means is less than a specific number (1), the specific setting means sets the advantageous state to be shifted more advantageously than when the number of games is equal to or greater than the specific number. and when the number of games grasped by the reserved number grasping means is equal to or greater than the specific number, the more the grasped number of games, the more advantageous the transition state is set. The gaming machine according to feature D2, characterized in that it is possible to

According to the above configuration, when the special result winning is successfully established before the specific number of games are completed after winning the special result, it is more advantageous than the case of winning with the specific number or more. On the other hand, if the special result winning cannot be established before the specific number of games are played, the more the number of games required until the special result winning is established, the more advantageous the state is set. Become so. By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game from when the special result is won until the specific number of games are completed, and after that, the game is more advantageous. It is possible to realize a game property in which the timing of the special result winning can be determined in relation to setting the state.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the specific number is one.

According to the above configuration, when the game in which the special result is won succeeds in establishing the special result prize, the advantageous state is set, but after that, the greater the number of reserved games, the more advantageous. is set in a favorable state. By doing so, it becomes more important to determine whether a special result is won or to win a prize, thereby improving the playability.

Feature D5. At least a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) are set as the special results,
The special transition means, when the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result stops at the effective position, shifts to the first special state as the special state, and moves the special state to the second special state at the effective position. When the second special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped, the special state is shifted to the second special state,
When the stop operating means is operated at the timing at which the first special picture combination can be stopped, the second special picture combination cannot be stopped and the second special picture combination cannot be stopped. When the stop operation means is operated at the timing when the stop is allowed, the first special picture combination and the second special picture combination are arranged so that the first special picture combination cannot be stopped. The game machine according to feature D4, characterized in that each pattern of is set.

According to the above configuration, as in the feature D4, in the game property that is advantageous when winning in the game in which the special result is won, when aiming for the first special result winning, the second special result winning is established. If you aim to win the second special result, you cannot achieve the first special result. If it is not possible to grasp whether or not the player has won a prize, the corresponding special result prize cannot be established. Therefore, it is possible to make the determination of which special result is won and the stop operation more carefully. It is also possible to realize game characteristics such as winning a prize based on intuition.

Feature D6. Upper limit end means for ending the advantageous state when the number of games in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (executing processing for ending the advantageous interval when the number of games by the main controller 101 reaches the upper limit number) function),
When the number of games ascertained by the reserved number ascertaining means is equal to or greater than the upper limit number, the specific setting means can set the game to the advantageous state, which is more advantageous than when the game number is less than the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized by:

As in the above configuration, the special state can be reserved for the upper limit number of games or more in the advantageous state, so that the special state and the advantageous state progress in parallel. Moreover, with the above configuration, when the number of games in the advantageous state is reserved above the upper limit number of games, the advantageous state is set to be more advantageous than when the number of games is less than the upper limit number of games. When the game ends due to reaching the number of games played, the feeling of disappointment that accompanies the end can be well followed up by the advantage of the advantageous state to be re-shifted.

Feature D7. It is set so that the predetermined advantageous end condition is satisfied in a predetermined specific game in the special state, and the specific setting means sets the predetermined advantageous transition condition in the game after the specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the advantage level of the advantageous state to be shifted to when is established is set.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous state in which the degree of advantage is set by the specific setting means is an advantageous state in which the advantageous state ends once during the special state and then shifts to. With such a configuration, the game in the state that the special result winning is reserved is related to the setting of the advantage degree of the advantageous state by the specific setting means, and the game in the state that the special result is reserved. can be played in an advantageous state. Therefore, for example, even if the game property can be set to an advantageous state that is more advantageous as the number of games played in this state increases like the feature D3, the game in this state is less likely to be a wasteful game.

Feature D8. The advantageous states are a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is likely to be performed, and a second advantageous state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is less likely to be performed than in the first advantageous state. (Normal mode, CZ mode) are set,
The specific setting means is configured to easily set the advantageous state to the first advantageous state in the special state shifted in the first advantageous state, and to set the advantageous state to the first advantageous state in the special state shifted in the second advantageous state. Characteristic D7, characterized in that the advantageous state is not set to the first advantageous state, or is more difficult to set to the first advantageous state than in the case of transitioning to the special state in the first advantageous state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when a shift to the special state is caused in the first advantageous state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, the advantageous state is temporarily terminated, but the advantageous state to be shifted again is set to the first advantageous state. Therefore, for example, when the number of games in the first advantageous state is set, it is possible to reset the first advantageous state by shifting to a special state during the first advantageous state. It is possible to increase the number of games. Moreover, since the number of games played after winning the special result is related to the degree of advantage in the advantageous state, not only is the transition to the special state occurring during the first advantageous state, but also after winning. Depending on the number of games played, the transition to the special state is advantageous or disadvantageous, and it is possible to realize interesting gameplay by associating the first advantageous state and the special state. Become.

Feature D9. a special ending means (a function of executing processing for ending the BB state in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101) that ends the special state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied in the special state;
The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the predetermined end condition can be satisfied even in the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the special state can end during the first advantageous state. With such a configuration, if the transition to the special state is made during the first advantageous state and the first advantageous state is reset, the transition to the special state is caused again during the first advantageous state. can be possible. Therefore, it is possible to realize game characteristics such as repeating the game of resetting the first advantageous state by shifting to the special state during the first advantageous state.

Feature D10. The advantageous termination condition in the first advantageous state set by the specific setting means is satisfied after the predetermined termination condition of the special state that triggered the setting of the first advantageous state is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature D9, characterized in that it is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, when a transition is made to the special state during the first advantageous state, and the reset of the first advantageous state is performed based on the transition, the reset first advantageous state is the same as that of the reset. It will continue longer than the special state that triggered it. Then, the special state ends during the reset first advantageous state, and after that, if the special result is won and the state can be shifted to the special state, the reset to the first advantageous state is performed according to the reserved number. It becomes possible. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize the game property of repeatedly resetting the first advantageous state.

The invention described in the features D1 to D10 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features D1 to D10, features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H12 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, but the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the second result that can award a different profit than when the first result wins can be won, or the result of the mode in which no win is established in any of the results (push order bell) is set,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (by main controller 101) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state based on a predetermined advantageous transition condition (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section in the first section display processing by the main controller 101);
Advantageous termination means for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state based on a predetermined advantageous termination condition (a function of executing processing for terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main controller 101);
End determination means for determining whether the advantageous end condition is satisfied (function for determining whether or not to perform processing for the end of the advantageous section in the second section display processing by the main controller 101);
with
The end determination means is
In the advantageous state, a predetermined first specific operation (BB winning) and a second specific operation (e.g., stop operation corresponding to winning the first minor combination when winning the bell in order of pushing) are performed by the player. In this case, while it is determined that the predetermined advantageous termination condition has been established,
In the advantageous state, although the first specific operation is performed by the player, a third specific operation different from the second specific operation (for example, a stop operation that does not correspond to winning the first minor combination when winning the bell in the order of pressing the bell) ) is performed, it is determined that the predetermined advantageous end condition is not satisfied,
a storage means (function for executing a process of setting a specific flag by the main control device 101) capable of storing specific information corresponding to the first specific operation and the third specific operation performed by the player;
When the first specific operation and the second specific operation are performed by the player and the specific information is stored, the end determination means satisfies the predetermined advantageous end condition. or limiting means for limiting the satisfaction of the above-mentioned predetermined advantageous end condition (when the specific flag by the main controller 101 is set, the process for ending the advantageous section is performed) a function that executes processing to prevent
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is the mode result, the first result winning is established if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, there are cases where the second result winning is established or none of the results are won, and mode notification including these first operation mode and second operation mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the mode notification is executed.

Since this mode notification can be executed in the advantageous state, but cannot be executed in the normal state, it is considered that the player expects the game state to shift from the normal state to the advantageous state. However, if the continuity of the transitioned advantageous state is completely left to the gaming machine, the game is started based on the player's start operation, and the game ends based on the player's stop operation. There is a possibility that the real thrill may be lost and the fun of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the above configuration, when the first specific operation and the second specific operation are performed by the player during the advantageous state, the advantageous end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends. It becomes possible for the player to participate in the continuity of the game, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game during the advantageous state.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the advantageous state is not simply terminated when the first specific operation is performed during the advantageous state, but is terminated when the second specific operation is performed as a set. For example, when the first specific operation is performed, the end of the advantageous state can be avoided by performing the third specific operation instead of the second specific operation, and the advantageous state ends based on the player's operation. It is possible to fully enjoy whether to do it or not.

In addition, when the end of the advantageous state is avoided by the third specific operation, the specific information is stored, and in the situation where the specific information is stored, the first specific operation and the second specific operation are performed thereafter. Even if it is, the advantageous state will not end. In this way, once the end of the advantageous state is avoided by performing the third specific operation, the end of the advantageous state based on the player's operation can be avoided as long as the specific information is stored. Therefore, when the first specific operation is performed, a more cautious operation is urged as to whether to perform the second specific operation or the third specific operation, and the advantageous state may end based on the player's operation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, for example, although the state is relatively advantageous immediately after transitioning to the advantageous state, the degree of advantage decreases after that, and so on. may be of benefit to By using the above configuration for such a gaming machine, it is possible for the player to re-shift to the advantageous state (end of the advantageous state) by himself/herself. If the third specific operation is performed instead of the second specific operation, as long as the specific information is stored, the chances of re-shifting are limited. Therefore, even with such a configuration, when the first specific operation is performed, a more cautious operation is urged as to which of the second specific operation and the third specific operation is to be performed. Based on this, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in which the advantageous state may end.

Feature E2. Means capable of erasing the specific information (clearing the specific flag by the main controller 101) when a predetermined specific condition (e.g., the end of the advantageous section or 100 games after the specific flag is set) is established. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing to

According to the above configuration, the period during which the end of the advantageous state based on the player's operation is restricted is limited. In this case, if the player does not want to end the advantageous state, the player does not want the specific condition to be established, and if the player has the advantage of ending the advantageous state, the specific condition is established. As a result, the enjoyment of the game is improved through the presence or absence of the establishment of the specific condition.

Feature E3. A specific advantageous termination condition ( The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the specific condition is not satisfied until it is determined that the AT mode is terminated or the upper limit is reached.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is not satisfied and the specific information is not erased until the advantageous state is terminated based on the satisfaction of another advantageous termination condition rather than the termination of the advantageous state based on the player's operation. . That is, in one advantageous state, once the first specifying operation and the third specifying operation are performed and the specifying information is stored, the first specifying operation and the second specifying operation are performed until the advantageous state ends. Even if you perform the operation, the advantageous state will not end. By doing so, the player's merit is increased in terms of the game property in which the advantageous state is to be continued, and the player who wants to re-shift to the advantageous state has only one chance to re-shift in one advantageous state. only. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game is dramatically increased when the second specific operation and the third specific operation are performed.

Feature E4. Specific processing execution means (function for executing advantageous section transition processing by main controller 101) capable of executing specific processing related to the mode notification when the advantageous transition device causes a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state. with
Any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that a specific event advantageous to the player (e.g., AT mode transition win, ceiling game number is 0) can occur as a result of the specific processing being performed. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the advantageous state is once terminated and then re-entered the advantageous state, the specific process is performed and a specific event advantageous to the player can occur, and the advantageous state is resumed. It is a configuration that has an advantage in migrating. By applying such a configuration to the characteristic E1, it is possible to provide a chance of re-migration while limiting it, thereby increasing attention to the chance of re-migration.

Feature E5. The advantageous states are a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is likely to be performed, and a second advantageous state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is less likely to be performed than in the first advantageous state. (Normal mode, CZ mode) and are set,
The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the specific event is transition to the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, when the advantageous state is ended by the first specifying operation and the second specifying operation and the advantageous state is re-transitioned, the transition to the first advantageous state can occur. By doing so, in order to cause the transition to the first advantageous state in the advantageous state, by temporarily ending the advantageous state, the transition to the first advantageous state is likely to occur. It is a novel game. It becomes possible to realize Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which an upper limit is set for the number of continuations of the advantageous state, etc., it is possible to reset the number of continuations of the advantageous state, etc. once when shifting to the first advantageous state. 1 You can enjoy the maximum profit in an advantageous state.

Feature E6. grasping means (advantage section game number AG, advantageous section increase/decrease number MY) for grasping at least one of the number of games in the advantageous state and the number of increased game values in the advantageous state;
The end determination means determines that the advantageous end condition is established when at least one of the number of games and the number of increases grasped by the grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit number,
When the advantageous state is ended by the advantageous end means, means for executing initialization processing of at least one of the number of games and the number of increases grasped by the grasping means (initialization of advantageous section information by main controller 101 A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, for example, by ending the advantageous state by the first specific operation and the second specific operation, the number of games played and the increased number are initialized. By doing so, it becomes possible to end the advantageous state by one's own operation before reaching the upper limit number. In a configuration in which a transition to a state occurs, it is possible to transition to the first advantageous state up to the upper limit number in a playable state.

Feature E7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined correspondence result and the stop operation means is operated by the second specific operation, the pattern combination corresponding to the correspondence result is stopped at the effective position. , when the lottery result by the lottery means is the corresponding result, and the stop operation means is operated by the third specific operation, the pattern combination corresponding to the corresponding result does not stop at the valid position; or The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein a combination of symbols corresponding to a result different from the corresponding result stops at the effective position.

According to the above configuration, the second specific operation and the third specific operation are such that the second specific operation is the operation that establishes the winning of the corresponding result when the corresponding result is won, and the third specific operation is the operation that does not establish the winning of the corresponding result. operation. By adopting such a configuration, if the advantageous state is terminated, winning as a response result is established, and if not terminated, winning as a response result is not established. It matches with the real pleasure of the slot machine that a prize is established and a privilege is obtained, and the game property is easily accepted by the player, and whether or not the advantageous state ends is determined by the pattern combination stopped at the effective position. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to make it easy-to-understand playability.

Feature E8. The correspondence result is the mode result,
The second specific operation is to operate the stop operation means in the first operation mode,
The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the third specific operation is to operate the stop operation means in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, in order to end the advantageous state in which the mode notification can be executed when the mode result is won, it is sufficient to perform the operation to establish the first result winning when the mode result is won, and the second result when the mode result is won. If an operation such as establishing a prize is performed, the advantageous state will not end. By doing so, the operation for ending the advantageous state and the operation for receiving the benefit during the advantageous state are shared, and the advantageous state ends while receiving the benefit during the advantageous state. It is possible to realize a playful game.

Feature E9. As the lottery results of the lottery means, special results (1st BB, 2nd BB) are set that enable the player to transition to an advantageous special state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the valid position, the special transition means (main controller 101) shifts the game state to the special state. the ability to perform bonus state processing by
If the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination does not stop at the valid position, it is possible to reserve information corresponding to the winning of the special result. Means (a function of carrying over the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag by the main control device 101);
with
The first specifying operation is performed when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, or when information corresponding to the winning of the special result is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein the stop operation means is operated so as to stop the special symbol combination immediately.

According to the above configuration, the first specific operation is an operation for winning a special result as a so-called bonus. That is, when the special result winning is established in the advantageous state, the advantageous state ends when the second specific operation is performed, the advantageous state does not end when the third specific operation is performed, and the third specific operation is performed. If the operation is performed, the advantageous state will not end even if the special result winning is established and the second specific operation is performed. By adopting such a configuration, there are cases where the advantageous state ends by shifting to the bonus state, and cases where the advantageous state does not end even if the state is shifted to the bonus state. It is possible to play while associating both games that can progress in . Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature E10. Any one of the second specific operation and the third specific operation is performed in a specific game which is a game before the special state ends after transitioning to the special state. The gaming machine of feature E9, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the transition to the special state occurs by performing the first specific operation, and the second specific operation or the third specific operation is performed in the specific game during the special state. By adopting such a configuration, after shifting to a so-called bonus state, not only does the player receive benefits during the bonus state, but also a game in which it is decided by one's own operation whether or not to end the advantageous state is played. becomes possible.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, the specific game is at least the game before the end of the special state. By doing so, for example, the advantageous state is ended in a specific game during the special state, and further, there is room for realizing the game property such as re-shifting to the advantageous state during the special state. Therefore, it is possible to make great use in improving the interest of the game.

Feature E11. The specific game includes at least a first specific game and a second specific game as a plurality of games,
The gaming machine according to feature E10, wherein the second specific operation and the third specific operation are set as the operations performed in the first specific game and the second specific game.

According to the above configuration, operations performed over a plurality of games during the special state are set as the second specific operation and the third specific operation. By doing so, it is possible to prolong the game in which the attention is focused, rather than the configuration in which it is determined whether or not the advantageous state ends by one operation, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved. can be increased to

Note that the game performed over a plurality of games may be, for example, the number of times a predetermined result is won in a plurality of games, or the total number of benefits granted based on operations in a plurality of games.

The invention described in the above features E1 to E11 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features E1 to E11, features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H12 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, but the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the second result that can award a different profit than when the first result wins can be won, or the result of the mode in which no win is established in any of the results (push order bell) is set,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (by main controller 101) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state based on a predetermined advantageous transition condition (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section in the first section display processing by the main controller 101);
Advantageous termination means for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state based on a predetermined advantageous termination condition (a function of executing processing for terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main controller 101);
with
A special result (first BB, second BB) that enables a transition to a special state advantageous to the player is set as a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the valid position, special transition means (bonus by main controller 101) for shifting to the special state function to perform state processing) and
Retaining means capable of reserving information corresponding to winning the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination does not stop at the valid position. (a function that enables carrying over the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag by the main control device 101);
Predetermined special information (BB payout special information updating means (function for updating the RT counter, BB payout counter, etc. by the main control unit 101) for updating the counter, RT counter, etc.);
A specific process executing means (function for executing a process for ending an advantageous section by the main controller 101) capable of executing a specific process related to the mode notification using at least the special information when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. When,
Number-of-times grasping means for grasping correspondence information corresponding to the number of times the special result has been won in one of the advantageous states or the number of times of transition to the special state (a function of executing a process of setting a specific flag by the main controller 101) )When,
Specifying means for changing the special information updated by the special information updating means according to the corresponding information grasped by the number of times grasping means (BB payout counter etc. updated based on the specific flag by the main controller 101) function to perform different processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is the mode result, the first result winning is established if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, there are cases where the second result winning is established or none of the results are won, and mode notification including these first operation mode and second operation mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the mode notification is executed.

In addition, as the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a special result is set that enables transition to a special state as a so-called bonus that is reserved if the game does not win a prize, and after winning the special result. Since special information that changes according to the progress of the special game including any game until the end of the special state may be used to execute the specific processing related to the mode notification, the progress of the bonus is associated with the advantageous state. be able to.

In addition, since the special information to be updated is different depending on the number of times the special result is won during one advantageous state or the number of times the special state is changed, for example, the special information based on the predetermined number of times of the special result win is changed. While it is used for the specific process, special information based on the special result winning for the number of times different from the predetermined number of times is not used for the specific process, or the special information is used for the specific process according to the number of transitions to the special state. There is no need to change the configuration for different contribution rates (degree of influence) for the processing configuration on the specific processing side according to the number of times a special result is won or the number of transitions to a special state, and a common processing configuration is used. becomes possible. Therefore, while simplifying the process, it is possible to change the result of the specific process according to the number of wins of the special result, etc., thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The specifying means specifies that the corresponding information ascertained by the number of times ascertaining means corresponds to the number of times the special result has been won or the number of times the transition to the special state has occurred a specific number of times (once). In the case of corresponding information, the special information updated by the special information updating means is predetermined first special information (for example, a BB payout counter), while the corresponding information grasped by the number of times grasping means is , when the information is different from the specific correspondence information, the special information updated by the special information updating means is predetermined second special information (for example, a specific BB payout counter);
Characteristic feature F1, wherein the specific process execution means is configured to execute the specific process using the first special information as the special information regardless of the correspondence information grasped by the number of times grasping means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the specific process executing means uses the first special information updated when these times are the specific times, regardless of the number of times the special results are won or the number of transitions to the special state. Since it is configured to execute specific processing, the update status of special information affects the specific processing only when it is a specific number of times, and in cases other than the specific number of times, even if special information is used, it is not updated Since the first special information of is used, the update status thereof does not affect the specific processing. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the processing of the specific processing and make the processing result different according to the number of winning times of the special result, etc., while making the processing common in any situation.

Feature F3. As the special information, predetermined special information for opportunity (BB game counter, specific BB game counter) and special information for processing different from the special information for opportunity (BB payout counter, specific BB payout counter) are included. is set and
When the special information update means updates the special information for opportunity to predetermined execution correspondence information (BB game counter=1), the specific process execution means uses the special information for processing to perform the It is a configuration that executes specific processing,
The specifying means specifies that the correspondence information ascertained by the number of times ascertaining means corresponds to the number of times the special result has been won or the number of times the transition to the special state has occurred a specific number of times (once). In the case of correspondence information, the special information for opportunity to be updated by the special information updating means is predetermined first special information for opportunity (BB game counter), and the correspondence grasped by the number grasping means When the information is information different from the specific correspondence information, the special information for opportunity updated by the special information updating means is predetermined second special information for opportunity (specific BB game counter). can be,
The specific process execution means is configured to execute the specific process using the first trigger special information as the trigger special information regardless of the correspondence information ascertained by the number of times ascertaining means. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.

According to the above configuration, the special trigger information for grasping the timing at which the specific process should be executed differs depending on the number of wins of the special result, etc., and if the special state etc. where the first special trigger information is updated, it can be specified. If the process is executed but the special information for the second trigger is updated instead of the special information for the first trigger, the specific process is not executed because it is not the timing to execute the specific process in the first place. Become. By doing so, it is possible to avoid unnecessary execution of the specific process without complicating the processing configuration of the specific process.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, further comprising initialization means for updating the special information to initial information when the special state ends.

According to the above configuration, the special information is initialized to the initial information each time the special state ends. By doing so, for example, even if the processing configuration is such that the special information in the special state of the predetermined number of times is used for the specific processing, after the special state of the predetermined number of times ends, the special information of the predetermined number of times is initialized to the initial information, and subsequent specific processing is performed using the initialized special information. Therefore, it is possible to make only the update status in the special state for the predetermined number of times contribute to the specific process.

Feature F5. A special termination means (function for executing BB termination processing in bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for terminating the special state when a predetermined special termination condition is satisfied in the special state;
The game according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the special termination condition is established by updating the predetermined special information to end special information by the special information updating means. machine.

According to the above configuration, the configuration is such that the information for judging the end of the special state is used as the special information for the specific processing, instead of preparing the special information for the specific processing, so that the existing configuration can be used effectively. As a result, it is possible to associate the specific process regarding the mode notification in the advantageous state with the information on the progress of the game in the special state.

Feature F6. The specific process executing means is
A configuration for executing a process of terminating the advantageous state according to the special information as the specific process,
If the special information updated by the special information updating means is the special information for dealing with termination, the processing for terminating the advantageous state is executed, and the updated special information is the special information for dealing with termination. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the processing for ending the advantageous state is not executed if the special information is different from the special information.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the advantageous state can be ended using the special information updated in the special state or the like, the advantageous state ends according to the number of times the special results are won or the number of transitions to the special state. It is possible to implement a simple configuration in which the type of special information to be updated is different.

Feature F7. Advantageous initialization means for executing initialization processing of information updated in the advantageous state when the advantageous end means terminates the advantageous state (function for executing initialization processing of advantageous section information by main controller 101) with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the correspondence information ascertained by the number-of-times ascertaining means is included in information for performing the initialization process by the advantageous initializing means. .

According to the above configuration, each time one advantageous state ends, the corresponding information corresponding to the number of winning times of the special results and the number of transitions to the special state grasped by the number grasping means is initialized. By doing so, the number of wins and the number of transitions can be managed as the number of times in one advantageous state, and it is possible to avoid taking over the degree of advantage across advantageous states.

The invention described in the above features F1 to F7 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features F1 to F7, features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H12 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, but the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the second result that can award a different profit than when the first result wins can be won, or the result of the mode in which no win is established in any of the results (push order bell) is set,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (by main controller 101) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state based on a predetermined advantageous transition condition (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section in the first section display processing by the main controller 101);
Advantageous termination means for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state based on a predetermined advantageous termination condition (a function of executing processing for terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main controller 101);
with
A special result (first BB, second BB) that enables a transition to a special state advantageous to the player is set as a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the valid position, special transition means (bonus by main controller 101) for shifting to the special state function to perform state processing) and
Retaining means capable of reserving information corresponding to winning the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination does not stop at the valid position. (a function that enables carrying over the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag by the main control device 101);
a special termination means (a function of executing processing for terminating the BB state in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for terminating the special state when a predetermined special termination condition is satisfied in the special state;
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the advantageous end condition is established in the special state, the advantageous transition condition is established before the special state ends.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is the mode result, the first result winning is established if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, there are cases where the second result winning is established or none of the results are won, and mode notification including these first operation mode and second operation mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the mode notification is executed.

Moreover, as a lottery result by the lottery means, a special result is set which enables transition to a special state as a so-called bonus that is reserved if no winning is established in the game, and an advantageous state is set in the special state. is set so that when the termination condition of (1) is satisfied, the transition condition to the advantageous state is satisfied during the special state. In other words, when the advantageous state ends during the special state, it is configured to transition again to the advantageous state during the special state, and it is possible to continue one advantageous state and the next advantageous state through the special state. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to associate a plurality of advantageous states using the special state, which can be used to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. First special information updating means (BB game counter and BB small winning combination by main control device 101) for updating predetermined first special information (BB game counter, BB small winning combination counter) according to the progress of the game in the special state function to update the counter),
The advantageous end condition is established when the first special information is updated to predetermined end information (BB game counter=1, BB minor combination counter=1),
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the special end condition is satisfied after the first special information is updated to the end information.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous state is terminated using the first special information updated according to the progress of the game in the special state. This makes it possible to successfully associate the special state with the advantageous state. The advantageous state ends when the first special information is updated to the end information, while the special state ends after the first special information is updated to the end information. After the is finished, there is still room for a re-transition to an advantageous state to occur. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to achieve a configuration in which the advantageous state is terminated during the special state while the special state and the advantageous state are well associated, and then the state is re-shifted to the advantageous state during the special state. can be done.

Feature G3. Second special information updating means (main control unit 101 updates the BB payout counter) for updating second special information (BB payout counter) different from the first special information in accordance with the progress of the game in the special state. function) and
When the advantageous transition means causes a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state, a specific process execution means (advantageous section by the main controller 101) capable of executing a specific process related to the mode notification using the second special information function to execute migration processing) and
The gaming machine according to feature G2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, after ending the advantageous state using the first special information that is updated according to the progress of the game during the special state, in the case of shifting to the advantageous state again, during the special state Using the second special information which is information to be updated and which is different from the first special information, specific processing relating to the mode notification at the time of transition to the advantageous state is performed. That is, both the information for ending the advantageous state during the special state and the information for shifting to the advantageous state during the special state are information updated according to the progress of the game during the special state, And it becomes separate information. By doing so, it is possible to make the information used for the specific process easily change according to the progress of the game during the special state, while further strengthening the association between the special state and the advantageous state.

More specifically, for example, when the same information is used for both the end of the advantageous state and the specific processing at the time of transition, the game progresses with little change from the end of the advantageous state to the transition again. Then, regardless of the progress of the game during the special state, there is a high possibility that the information used in the end of the advantageous state and the specific processing will be the same information. In that respect, as described above, by using separate information, the end timing of the advantageous state changes according to the progress of the game during the special state, or the second special information used for the advantageous state to re-shift changes. You can expect to Therefore, the game can be diversified, and the player can be greatly interested in the progress of the game during the special state.

Feature G4. When the game progress until the first special information is updated to the end information in the special state is the first game progress, the second special information is updated to the first information (BB payout counter=7, etc.). ,
When the game progress until the first special information is updated to the end information in the special state is a second game progress different from the first game progress, the second special information is different from the first information. It is configured to be updated to the second information (BB payout counter = 1, etc.),
When the specific process is performed by the specific process execution means using the first information, the result of the specific process is more likely to be the game than when the specific process is performed using the second information. The gaming machine according to feature G3, characterized in that it tends to result in an advantageous result for the player.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature G3. In this manner, the second special information is updated to the first information or updated to the second information according to the progress of the game until the first special information is updated to the end information. When the specific processing is performed using the 1st information, the result of the specific processing is more advantageous for the player than when the specific processing is performed using the 2nd information. As a result, in the game until the first special information is updated to the end information, the player wishes to proceed with the game so as to be updated to the first information, thereby improving interest during the special state. becomes possible.

Feature G5. As the special state, a first special state (first BB state) in which the number of games required until the first special information becomes the end information is the first number of games, and the first special information becomes the end information. A second special state (second BB state) in which the number of games required to complete the game is a second number of games different from the first number of games is set. machine.

According to the above configuration, the number of games required from the transition to the special state to the end of the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the special state. By doing so, it is highly likely that different second special information will be used in the specific processing that is performed when re-shifting to an advantageous state. Therefore, depending on which special state the player transitions to, the results of the specific processing are likely to differ, and it is possible to draw a high degree of interest in the transitioning special state and the winning special result.

Feature G6. When the first special information is updated to the end information in the first special state, the second special information may be updated to third information (for example, BB payout counter = 14). and, when the first special information is updated to the end information in the second special state, the second special information may be updated to the third information. The gaming machine according to feature G5.

According to the above configuration, the second special information supplied to the specific process may be the same third information in any special state. By doing so, for example, the specific processing does not have to be configured exclusively for each special state, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature G7. The type of the second special information that is updated when the first special information is updated to the end information in the first special state is that the first special information is updated to the end information in the second special state. The configuration is included in the type of the second special information that is updated when it is updated, or it is updated when the first special information is updated to the end information in the second special state. The type of the second special information is included in the type of the second special information updated when the first special information is updated to the end information in the first special state. The gaming machine according to feature G6.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature G6. By doing so, by setting the processing configuration of the specific processing for the special state on the side with many patterns (types) of the second special information, in the special state on the side with few patterns, the special state on the side with many patterns It is possible to use the specific processing for the special state as it is.

Feature G8. The probability that the second special information is updated to the third information when the first special information is updated to the end information in the first special state, and the probability that the first special information is updated to the third information in the second special state The gaming machine according to feature G6 or feature G7, wherein when the information is updated to the end information, the probability that the second special information is updated to the third information is different.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second special information updated to the third information is used for the specific processing regardless of the special state, the second special information updated to the third information according to each special state is used. Since the probability of using the special information is different, for example, even if the result of the specific processing using the third information is not changed according to the special state, the specific processing can be performed according to the special state as a whole. It is also possible to make it easier for the results of . Also, even if the result of the specific process using the third information differs depending on the special state, the probability of obtaining the third information is also different for each special state, so the difference between each special state becomes more pronounced. . In this way, by varying the probability of the third information depending on the special state, it is possible to skillfully characterize each special state, and draw attention to which special state the transition is made to. .

Feature G9. The specific processing performed by the specific processing executing means has the same processing result when the third information is used in the first special state and when the third information is used in the second special state. The game machine according to any one of features G6 to G8, characterized in that it is set so that

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the specific process using the third information does not differ according to the special status, it is possible to make the result of the specific process easily different according to the special status from a total point of view. becomes. Therefore, by making the probability of the third information different according to the special state, it is possible to characterize each special state well, and draw attention to which special state the transition is made to.

Feature G10. The specific processing performed by the specific processing executing means has different processing results depending on whether the third information is used in the first special state or the third information is used in the second special state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G6 to G8, wherein the gaming machine is set to obtain

According to the above configuration, each special state has a different probability of becoming the third information, so the difference between each special state becomes more remarkable. Therefore, by making the probability of the third information different according to the special state, it is possible to characterize each special state well, and draw attention to which special state the transition is made to.

The invention described in the features G1 to G10 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features G1 to G10, features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H12 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, but the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the second result that can award a different profit than when the first result wins can be won, or the result of the mode in which no win is established in any of the results (push order bell) is set,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (by main controller 101) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state based on a predetermined advantageous transition condition (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section in the first section display processing by the main controller 101);
Advantageous termination means for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state based on a predetermined advantageous termination condition (a function of executing processing for terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main controller 101);
with
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is likely to be performed, and a second advantageous state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is less likely to be performed than in the first advantageous state. (Normal mode, CZ mode) and are set,
First advantageous transition determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) for executing a first advantageous transition determination for transitioning to the first advantageous state in the second advantageous state;
When the result of the first advantageous transition determination by the first advantageous transition determination means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state to transition from the second advantageous state to the first advantageous state Transition means (function for executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section in the first section display processing by main controller 101);
When the number of games in the second advantageous state reaches a predetermined specific number, regardless of the result of the first advantageous transition determination by the first advantageous transition determination means, or by the first advantageous transition determination means Specific first advantageous transition means for transitioning to the first advantageous state without performing the first advantageous transition determination (function for executing processing for causing transition to AT mode based on reaching the number of ceiling games by main controller 101) When,
specific number setting means for setting the specific number when the advantageous transition means causes a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state;
with
A special result (first BB, second BB) is set as a lottery result by the preceding lottery means, which enables a transition from a normal game state (normal game state, carry-over state) to a special state advantageous to the player,
A special transition means (main a function of executing bonus state processing by the control device 101);
Retaining means capable of reserving information corresponding to winning the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination does not stop at the valid position. (a function that enables carrying over the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag by the main control device 101);
with
The specific number setting means makes it easier to set a smaller number of games as the specific number in the case of setting the specific number in the special state than in the case of setting the specific number in the normal game state. Characteristic game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is the mode result, the first result winning is established if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, there are cases where the second result winning is established or none of the results are won, and mode notification including these first operation mode and second operation mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the mode notification is executed.

Mode notification is performed in an advantageous state, and in this advantageous state, setting is made so that mode notification is more likely to be performed in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. Then, in the second advantageous state, a first advantageous transition determination to the first advantageous state is performed, and a specific number is also set as the ceiling number of games to the first advantageous state. Therefore, even if the first advantageous transition determination is not won, if at least a specific number of games are completed in the second advantageous state, the transition to the first advantageous state will occur, and the willingness to play in the second advantageous state will be increased. It is devised to stir up.

Moreover, as a lottery result by the lottery means, a special result is set which enables transition to a special state as a so-called bonus that is reserved if no winning is established in the game, and an advantageous state is set in the special state. When the transition to the advantageous state occurs during the normal game state, the specific number of ceiling games is set to be smaller than when the transition to the advantageous state occurs during the normal game state. It is advantageous for the player if the transition to . By doing so, it is possible to add a new advantage to the transition to the bonus state, and to increase the expectation of the transition to the special state as the bonus state and the winning of the special result. can be suitably increased.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the advantageous end condition is established when the transition to the special state occurs.

According to the above configuration, the special result is won, and the special combination of symbols is stopped at the valid position, thereby causing a shift to the special state and ending the advantageous state. By doing so, it becomes easier to play the game in the special state as the normal state, and when the transition to the advantageous state occurs in the special state, the number of ceiling games is shortened. can do.

Feature H3. Restriction means capable of restricting the establishment of the advantageous end condition (a function of executing processing to set a specific flag by the main controller 101, an advantageous section when 7 cards are not paid out in the first BB game) A gaming machine according to feature H2, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing to prevent termination.

According to the above configuration, in the feature H2, the termination of the advantageous state may be restricted. can also By doing so, it is possible to secure the game balance of the game in which the number of ceiling games is set to be short in the transition to the advantageous state during the special state.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the restricting means restricts the establishment of the advantageous end condition when the transition to the special state occurs.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature H3.

Feature H5. In a predetermined specific game in the special state, when the first game result (seven cards payout) is achieved, the advantageous end condition is established or is likely to be established, while in the specific game the first game result and The feature H3 or feature H4 is characterized in that if a different second game result (1 card payout, etc.) is obtained, the advantageous end condition is not satisfied, or is less likely to be satisfied than in the case of the first game result. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous state does not always end even if the special state is entered, and the advantageous state ends when the game result of the specific game during the special state becomes the first game result, and the second game is ended. Advantage does not end when a result is achieved. By doing so, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to obtain a chance of being set to a short ceiling game number by shifting to an advantageous state during the special state, and to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the specific game during the special state.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein the restricting means restricts such that the advantageous end condition is not satisfied even when the first game result is obtained in the specific game.

According to the above configuration, even if the first game result is obtained in the specific game during the special state, it is clarified that the advantageous state may not end due to the restricting means. By doing so, it is possible to limit the chance of resetting the number of ceiling games while increasing the degree of attention to the specific game, thereby improving the soundness of the game.

Feature H7. Storage means for storing predetermined special information (specific flag) when a transition to the advantageous state occurs in the special state (function for executing processing for setting the specific flag by the main controller 101) ,
The game according to any one of the features H3 to H6, wherein the limiting means limits the establishment of the advantageous end condition in the special state shifted to in the state where the special information is stored. machine.

According to the above configuration, the special information is stored when the special state is shifted to the advantageous state and a chance for a short ceiling game number is generated. As a result, after that, the advantageous section will not end during the special state, and as a result, the player will not be able to receive a chance of a short ceiling number of games. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately limit the chance of a short ceiling game number.

Feature H8. Storage lottery means (function for executing a specific flag set lottery by the main controller 101) for executing a memory lottery for storing the special information when a transition to the advantageous state occurs in the special state,
The game according to feature H7, wherein the memory means stores the special information when the result of the memory lottery by the memory lottery means corresponds to storing the special information. machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the transition to the advantageous state occurs during the special state, the special information is not always stored, and the special information is stored according to the result of the memory lottery, and the ceiling is stored after that. Limited opportunities to reset the number of games. By doing so, it is possible to improve the playability of the game in which the number of ceiling games is reset.

Feature H9. The storage lottery means prefers the memory lottery when the specific number set by the specific number setting means is a second specific number larger than the first specific number than when the specific number is the first specific number. The game machine according to feature H8, characterized in that the lottery result is set so as to easily correspond to the storing of the special information.

According to the above configuration, when a long ceiling game number is set, the special information is less likely to be stored than when a short ceiling game number is set. Here, if a transition to a special state occurs near the ceiling game number and the ceiling game number is reset, there is a high possibility that the games up to that point will be wasted, and it is unlikely that the ceiling game number will be reached yet. It is more advantageous for the player to cause the transition to the special state in such a situation. In that respect, with the above configuration, a short ceiling game number is set, and considering the risk of resetting the ceiling game number even though the ceiling game number is near, a long ceiling game number is set. When it is predicted that the number of ceiling games has been set, a game can be performed in which a transition to the special state is attempted again, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature H10. When a predetermined special end condition is established in the special state, the special end means for shifting from the special state to the normal game state (executing the BB state end processing in the bonus state processing by the main controller 101) function),
As the special state, a first special state (first BB state) in which a predetermined first special end condition is set as the special end condition, and a second special end condition different from the first special end condition are defined as the special state. A second special state (second BB state) set as a special end condition is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, wherein when a transition to the advantageous state occurs in the special state, the advantageous state is difficult to end until the special state ends.

According to the above configuration, once the number of ceiling games is set by shifting to an advantageous state during a special state, the advantageous state continues at least until the special state is terminated. In order to reset the number, it is necessary to terminate the special state and then cause a transition to the special state again. In this case, in the above configuration, since a plurality of special states with different ending conditions are set, the number of games played until the next chance to reset the ceiling game number comes depending on which special state the transition is made to. are likely to differ. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the rate of resetting the number of ceiling games only by increasing the types of special states as bonus states, and to diversify the games of feature H1 with a relatively simple configuration. becomes possible.

Feature H11. When the game result of the special game before the transition to the advantageous state occurs in the special state is the first game result (payout of 7 cards), the specific number setting means is the game of the special game. Any one of features H1 to H10 characterized in that it is easier to set a smaller number of games as the specific number than when the result is a second game result (e.g., payout of one card) different from the first game result. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it is not only necessary to simply shift to the advantageous state during the special state, but the game result of the special game before shifting to the advantageous state becomes the first game result, so that the second game As a result, it becomes easier to set a smaller number of ceiling games. By doing so, it is possible to significantly improve the playability during the special state.

Feature H12. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result can be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, but the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the second result that can award a different profit than when the first result wins can be won, or the result of the mode in which no win is established in any of the results (push order bell) is set,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (by main controller 101) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification, a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
Advantageous transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state based on a predetermined advantageous transition condition (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section in the first section display processing by the main controller 101);
Advantageous termination means for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state based on a predetermined advantageous termination condition (a function of executing processing for terminating the advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main controller 101);
with
Specific processing executing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification when the advantageous transition means causes a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state (a function of executing processing for setting the number of ceiling games by the main controller 101) )When,
with
A special result (first BB, second BB) is set as a lottery result by the preceding lottery means, which enables a transition from a normal game state (normal game state, carry-over state) to a special state advantageous to the player,
A special transition means (main a function of executing bonus state processing by the control device 101);
Retaining means capable of reserving information corresponding to winning the special result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination does not stop at the valid position. (a function that enables carrying over the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag by the main control device 101);
with
The specific process executing means is configured to perform the specific process in such a manner that execution of the specific process in the special state is more advantageous for the player than execution of the specific process in the normal game state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is easy to execute

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game started based on the operation of the start operation means is the mode result, the first result winning is established if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, If the operation is performed in the second operation mode, there are cases where the second result winning is established or none of the results are won, and mode notification including these first operation mode and second operation mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's profit greatly differs depending on whether or not the mode notification is executed.

Mode notification can be executed in an advantageous state and cannot be executed in a normal state, but as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a shift to a special state as a so-called bonus is reserved if winning is not established in the game. If a special result is set and the transition to the advantageous state occurs during the special state, it is executed during the transition to the advantageous state rather than when the transition to the advantageous state occurs during the normal game state. It is set so that the result of the specific processing relating to the mode notification is likely to be advantageous to the player. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to make the transition to the advantageous state during the special state as much as possible, and a new advantage can be added to the transition to the bonus state. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the expectation of shifting to a special state as a bonus state and winning a special result.

Note that the configurations limited by the features H1 to H11 may be applied individually or in combination with the feature H12. may be applied, or some configurations may be applied in combination.

The invention described in the features H1 to H12 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features H1 to H12, features A1 to A21, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F7, features G1 to G10, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H12 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature H group to each configuration of the feature group A to feature group H detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that enables a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and a second result in which the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. a second result that allows winning when operated in the operation mode of 2,
A mode notification means capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode and the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
A specific state is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed,
means capable of transitioning to the specific state based on predetermined transition conditions;
means capable of terminating the specific state based on a predetermined termination condition;
means capable of executing a transition determination that enables the transition condition to be established based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
means capable of executing a predetermined process related to the mode notification in the game subsequent to the game in which the transition condition is satisfied;
with
The transition determination is set so that the number of cases in which it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied is greater than the number of cases in which it is determined that the transition condition is not satisfied,
means capable of executing the first notification in a game in which the transition condition is satisfied;
means capable of executing a second notification in a game in which the predetermined process is executed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images